Home

Inter-Tel IVX 500

1. 693 2004 Page 6 1 REPLACEMENT PARTS INTER TEL PRACTICES Issue 1 August 1994 IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FIGURE 6 1 REPLACEMENT PARTS CONT D DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER IVX500 PC continued Database Programming Cable Kit includes the following 828 1273 Line Cord two pair reversing ooooooooooooon o 813 1592 DB9 Modular Adapter female non reversing four wire 804 2420 DB25 Modular Adapter female reversing four wire 804 2425 DB9 to DB25 Converter female to male non reversing 804 2438 AIC To Reset Switch Interface Cable o o 813 1588 Optional PC Wall Mount Shelf fits most PC models 691 3109 NOTE Depending on the specific model of PC being used some of the parts and part numbers listed on the previous page could vary somewhat For exam ple instead of a separate SPC some PCs may have a Disk Controller Com bination Card 691 3007 that is equipped with serial and parallel ports Software Applications Software and Database Programming Software 827 7600 Manuals Installation amp Field Maintenance Manual 693 8000 Voice Mail User Guide oooooooooooomoooonoooooo 693 8001 System Administrator Quick Reference Guide 693 8002 Subscriber Quick Reference Guide oooooooooooo o 693 8003 Page 6 2 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE INDEX Issue 1
2. ooooooomoomoooooooroso 3 28 B Creating Extension IDs oooooooooooocososcnccorcssosoo 3 29 C Deleting Extension IDs ooooooooooooorosoononorrrrrnosanosos 3 30 11 Group Lists oooooooonocococrorsoasconcaconosnnosrorronorrrasssca 3 31 12 Mailbox Programming oo ooooocoomoccocroscnrooscoscrrssrsorosss 3 35 A Creating Or Changing A Mailbox Number o ooooooomooroso 3 36 B Batch Creation Of Mailboxes oooooooooocnroconcrrorsssosoo 3 36 C Deleting Mailboxes o oooooomonoororcrrororrrsososoncarns o 3 37 D Clearing Mailbox Messages ooooooooonoopoonorromsrrosossrsss ce 3 38 E Programming A Mailbox o ooooooooooorncoscororossosososo 3 39 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE AE a SD CONTENTS PAGE 13 Miscellaneous Information ooooooooooooooo oo eee eee 3 46 A Auto Attendant Information oooooooooooooooooooooorrooo 3 47 B Custom Recordings ccccccssccccccccccenccccsccccccccccerseses 3 48 omga 14 Report a 15 System Maintenance secssesessesesessossososssoessecossesoscoe A Dial 0 Destination Programming B Day Mode Programming ccccccccccccccscccccccccccecccucs Ce Passwords cd aa D Save And Restore ii 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 This section of the Inter Tel IVX500 System manual explains how to program the system Program ming functions are divided among s
3. TALLATION AND FIELD NS MAINTENANCE MANUAL we et ve a Part No 693 8000 Issue 1 August 1994 Part Number 693 8000 INTEGRATED IVX500 INSTALLATION AND FIELD MAINTENANCE MANUAL Issue 1 August 1994 Inter Tel Integrated Systems Inc 1994 Printed in USA INTER TEL PRACTICES TABLE OF CONTENTS IVX500 INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS PAGE TABLE OF CONTENTS ooooococoocooomoooso des v LIST OF FIGURES ds cia oa ai vii FCC REGULATIONS isis iia AA viii LIMITED WARRANTY ooooooooooomoooooo iaa E T ix SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTALLATION 2 2 cece ccc cee cece ccc e tenes 1 1 T Introduction srecen E AA eae es 1 2 2 System Capacities rad eee baie rin 1 2 3 Installation And Programming Outline 0 cc cee cee eee eee eee 1 2 A TVX500 System Specifications 6664s ok es ch ein Vas esae ete SS ewsa es 1 3 5 Proeraming PC Specitications srren sees te a dGb eee e ee 1 4 6 IVX500 PC Installation cesce rir 26 AED AAA Sweeties 1 5 7 IVX500 PC Hard Disk Drive Replacement oooooooooomooooo 1 19 FEATURES ASA 2 1 1 ANGOdUChOn dd AAA eds 2 2 2 Automated Attendant AR eee RARA 2 3 3 Call Routing Announcement visccucapdr cules sab wwe oh a Pew NSO ee 2 5 Ay VOICE Malla aa ee ew ee Son de eee eesti on a ee es 2 7 5 Directories Automated Attendant Call Routing Announcement And Voice Mail 2
4. 3 When the message has finished playing you have the following options a Page 2 12 Press 1 to replay the message from the be ginning Press 2 to reply to the message unless it was a system sent message or from an out side telephone number This option is not provided for receive only mailboxes Press 3 to forward a copy of the message to another subscriber along with your introduc tory comments If the message was marked private when it was sent you cannot for ward it Receive only mailboxes cannot use this option Press 4 to listen to the previous message Press 5 to play the message envelope again Press 6 to listen to the next message Press to save the new message in your mailbox for future action Press 9 to delete the message from your mailbox If you want to reply to or forward a message do this before you delete it Delet ing a message completely removes it from your mailbox INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Sending A Message 4 36 As a subscriber you can record and send voice messages to other users or to group lists from the sub scriber Main Menu Follow these steps 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Dial the Voice Mail application access number You hear the main menu During or after the greeting press to identify yourself as a subscriber Enter your mailbox number and personal pass wor
5. eee eT ee re E E 4 23 D Message Center iii ete ew nie a as 4 23 E Camp On Tones sesssesesescsesoossesocoosososossessssssoeese 4 23 F Validated Mailbox Numbers cccccccccsscccccccccccccecece 4 24 G Call Forwarding ia A id 4 24 H Outside Calls iii aig eS a pita bean Aaa 4 24 I Setting The Date And Time ccc ccc cc cc cc ccccccccccceccece 4 24 APPLICATION AND TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP APPLICATIONS amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE CONTENTS PAGE 7 Inter Tel GMX 152D System o ooooooooooooooromosrormrsossro 4 25 A Hardware Requirements cccccccccccccccnccccccccccscececee 4 25 B Hunt Group Programming o ooooooooooooooooooroP rorcscoscoso 4 25 C Message Waiting Notification oooooooooooooopooroooosoroso 4 26 D Message Center sosa ida 4 26 Be Camp On Tone oirlo 4 26 F Validated Mailbox Numbers CARLA AS 4 27 G Cal Forwardin lt ssineri 4 27 H Outside Calls nia 4 27 I Setting The Date And Time EA 4 28 8 Inter Tel GLX Plus System ooooooooomoooooommooorororosssrosso 4 29 A Hardware Requirements ccccccccccccccsccccccecescccccese 4 29 Bs Camp On Tones 1 00 AR AAA TARA A ee 4 29 E Call Forwarding orinar dir 4 29 D Hunt Group Arrangement ooooooooooooocoroooososoooo 4 29 E TVAS00 Programming cai as 4 29 F Setting The Date And Time ooooooo
6. 3 Complete the following programming using a 4 Page 4 22 station instrument connected to the single line port that will be connected to the IVX500 circuit a Temporarily connect a single line set to the station circuit assigned the last station in the hunt group 115 in the example NOTE If using a DC ringing single line set it will ring continuously whenever on hook This is nor mal and will not affect off hook program ming procedures b Lift the handset dial the forward no answer feature code default 356 and then dial the extension number of the first station in the hunt group 112 in the example c Remove the phone and reconnect the IVX500 to the station circuit To use the hunt group arrangement the follow ing programming must be completed in the IVX500 database a Applications Programming window e Applications Programming Create the necessary IVX500 applications using the application setup instructions in this chapter e Port Programming Port Configura tion Select the appropriate application type Automated Attendant Call Routing Announcement etc for each TVX500 port e Enable Remote Messaging Lamp Notifi cation Enable any or all of the IVX500 ports for Remote Messaging Lamp Noti fication This allows them to turn on the INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE APPLICATION amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 message waiting indica
7. Page 3 60 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 FIGURE 3 1 APPLICATION STATISTICS REPORT SAMPLE APPLICATION STATISTICS description XXX Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls Connect Minutes Minutes Call Transfers to Operator Call Routing Ann description xxx description XXX description XXX Call Routing Totals Incoming Calls Connect Minutes Minutes Call Totals Incoming Calls Connect Time HH MM Minutes Call Transfers to Operator VM Msgs Left Cumulative statistics since Totals Calls Messages Left Transfers to Operator Day XXX XXX XX Day Day APPLICATION STATISTICS PORT ACTIVITY All ports busy 07 00 07 30 AM 07 30 08 00 08 00 08 30 04 00 04 30 04 30 05 00 05 00 05 30 05 30 06 00 Off Peak Hours Total hours minutes all ports busy Day Day Day Monxx Monxx Monxx Page 3 61 Day Day Day Date xx xx xxxx Day Day Day Date Day reports were last cleared on xx xx xxxx XX XX XXXX Day Monxx Monxx Monxx Monxx PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FIGURE 3 2 DIRECTORY LISTING REPORT SAMPLES ee DIRECTORY LISTING BY FIRST NAME Directory Description Number ARTHUR GOODMAN 242 LAB LAB 200 MARK FONTANA 272 MARK HARRIS 216 NORMA EATON 100 TODD LINEN 215 DIRECTORY LISTING
8. fected 15 8 PASSWORDS Select this command button to program the IVX500 System programming passwords The window shown on page 3 66 appears 15 9 SAVE RESTORE This option is not available in Stand Alone programming sessions To save or re store the system database select this command button The window shown on page 3 67 appears Page 3 63 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE e ES gt a AS Ree et s a VORRRR RR RRA RRAR APR RR RRA RRA x 3 Ht RCA I mhz S Y 7 tid oy oy A A RITA o RADA Dee ae ET sete Pats RARA AN Extension Extension Y A DIAL 0 DESTINATION PROGRAMMING 15 10 This window appears when you select the Day or Night command button shown on the preceding page 15 11 DESTINATION TYPE Select the Destina tion Type drop down list box and scroll the highlight bar to the desired type Extension Mailbox or None If Mailbox or Extension is selected the system will automatically transfer the caller to the designated mail box or extension when 0 is pressed If None is se lected operator access will be denied from Voice Mail and Auto Attendant applications 0 will be an invalid entry 15 12 EXTENSION If the destination type is Ex tension you must enter the desired destination in the Extension text box If you enter an invalid number you will see a warning and must try again 15 13 MAILBOX If the
9. gramming windows contains boxes and or buttons for selecting and entering specific information These in clude Text Boxes List Boxes Drop Down List Boxes Command Buttons Option Buttons and Check Boxes Samples of each are shown in the following paragraphs 4 2 To move among items in a window you may use the TAB key ALT key or mouse as follows o Using the TAB key Press the TAB key repeatedly until the desired area is highlighted by a gray box and a dark outline or filler To move in reverse press the SHIFT and TAB keys at the same time e Using the ALT key Pressing a combination of the ALT key and the underlined character allows you to move directly to the desired area For example in the following sample Text Box you would use ALT D because the D in Description is under lined e Using a mouse To select an item simply place the mouse cursor on the desired item and click the left button A TEXT BOX EXAMPLE Description 4 3 A text box is used when the requested information requires typing The vertical line is the cursor that indi cates where text will be inserted As you type the line moves to the right pushing any existing text to the right The line can be moved right or left using the arrow keys on the keyboard or by pointing the mouse cursor at the desired place and clicking the left button once 4 4 If the contents of the box are highlighted in re verse video when you begin typing the
10. ing telephone line cord instead tip and ring for both ports must be switched at the modu lar jack assembly e Plug the other end of each line cord into the appropriate jack on the corresponding Voice Processing Card in the IVX500 PC See paragraph 4 8 on page 1 3 for more in formation on the VPC jacks 9 Connect the IVX500 PC s power cable accord ing to the PC manufacturer s instructions and turn on the AC power switch NOTE For optimal performance the TVX500 PC is configured with turbo mode always en abled Do not disable the turbo mode setting 6 7 To connect a customer provided programming PC to the IVX500 PC refer to page 3 10 in PROGRAM SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION INTER TEL PRACTICES Issue 1 August 1994 IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FIGURE 1 1 IVX500 PC AND TELEPHONE SYSTEM INTERFACE MODULAR OM RING JACK ASSEMBLY 66M1 50 TYPE 9 0 BLOCK TOPC PART OF MDF il TIP W BL Y Hg O O El RING BUM TIP W O ae a RE TO TELEPHONE FING OW im SYSTEM SINGLE TIP W G LINE CARD aaa 1 3 1 3 aa ia Ey RING BRW x ES TOPC mi NOTE Each modular jack assembly as wired above is connected to the IVX500 PC using a two pair non reversing straight through mod to mod line cord To use a standard two pair reversing telephone line cord instead tip and ring for both ports must be switched at the modular jack assem bly Page 1 8 INTER TEL PRACTICES SP
11. on tones 9 14 To allow the IVX500 to recognize camp on tones when placing a call the Camp On timer must be ad justed System Wide Features Timers window Change the Camp On timer to 10 seconds de fault is 3 seconds F VALIDATED MAILBOX NUMBERS 9 15 This feature affects calls transferred to voice mail or placed through an automated attendant on the IVX500 If all mailbox numbers and extension IDs match extension numbers are associated the Vali date Voice Mailbox Numbers option should be enabled to allow the system to check that the number entered by the caller is valid If there are mailbox numbers that do not match an extension number non associated there is no need to validate and this option should be disabled 9 16 If the telephone system is programmed to validate voice mailbox numbers and the caller dials a number that does not have an associated mailbox on the IV X500 the number will be considered invalid even if a non associated mailbox with that number exists System Wide Features Miscellaneous System Wide Information System Flags Programming window If all mailboxes and extension IDs on the IVX500 are marked as associated and match the extension numbers in the telephone system enable the Validate Voice Mailbox Num bers flag Page 4 31 APPLICATIONS amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE a D G CALL F
12. tion marks press the 1 key 5 7 _ After the digits have been entered the caller pres ses to begin the search The Automated Attendant application plays the name that most closely matches the digit s that were entered If is pressed without entering any digits the caller will hear the first name in the directory 5 8 Ifa user presses 0 at any time while spelling a name the system will play a helpful prompt instructing the caller how to enter a name Changing The First Last Name Search 5 9 Each directory can be programmed to be orga nized by last name or by first name Callers accessing a directory receive system voice prompts that ask them to enter the first or last name of the person for whom they wish tc leave a message Listening To The Next Previous Name 5 10 After a name has been played the caller can lis ten to the previous name in the directory by pressin 1 To listen to the next name the caller can press al 5 11 The directory lists are circular That is when the end of the list is reached the next name played will be the first name in the directory Or if the caller scrolls past the beginning of the list the previous name played will be the last name in the directory B ACCEPTING A NAME 5 12 When the caller is using the Voice Mail feature and accepts a name the caller is transferred to the corre sponding mailbox There the caller will hear either the subscriber s recorded greeting
13. 4 2 The recommended installation method is to install the AC or DC ringing IVX500 on OPX circuits on an IDC card not on SLC card circuits Set up the OPX cir cuits for the proper ringing AC or DC 4 3 When connecting the IVX500 PC to the telephone system single line circuits do not include the second pair 30VDC and ground from the single line circuits The 30VDC from the single line circuits will damage the IVX500 PC B HUNT GROUP PROGRAMMING 4 4 This section contains the procedures required for programming the single line circuits connected to IVX500 ports into hunt groups Depending on the soft ware version of your telephone system you will use one of the following programming methods o With Voice Computer Hunt Groups These hunt groups can utilize dial rules and or the DTMF feed back Voice Talk feature as described below See page 4 4 for more information on dial rules e With Voice Mail Hunt Groups These hunt groups are specially designed for use by voice processing units like the IVX500 See page 4 13 e Without Voice Mail Hunt Groups Older systems do not have voice mail or voice computer hunt groups but can be programmed to function like a hunt group with the IVX500 See page 4 14 With Voice Computer Hunt Groups 4 5 In some systems single line circuits used by the IVX500 can be programmed into a voice computer hunt group The group has a pilot number that is dialed to ac cess the ports With a vo
14. A Hardware Requirements ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccvese 4 12 B Hunt Group Programming cccccccccccccccccccccccccvcccece 4 12 C Message Waiting Notification ccccceccccccccccccccccccccece 4 15 D Message Center ninia A ee wk ewes bettas 4 15 Ee Camp On Tones cert avs sete tea sw ieee hou ee cask ebetiews 4 15 F Validated Mailbox Numbers cccceccccccccccccccccccccercces 4 15 G Call Porwarding ici ii tibia 4 16 Me Outside Calls ii ns 4 16 I Setting The Date And Time ccc ccc cece ccc ccc ccvcccscceecs 4 16 5 Inter Tel IMX 1224 2460 And Premier ESP Systems oooooooooooo 4 17 A Hardware Requirements ccccccccccsccccccccsccccccccecece 4 17 B Hunt Group Programming ccceccecccccccccccccccccccecs 4 17 C Message Waiting Notification ccc cece n ccc ccccccccccecesecs 4 19 D Message Center siii a 4 19 E Camp On Tones aaa dada 4 19 F Validated Mailbox Numbers 2c cccc cece cece cccccccevecees 4 19 6 Call Forward ino ida aaa 4 20 H Outside Calls arica cr hiest S44 a oS sae wee eS 4 20 I Setting The Date And Time ccc cece cc ccc cc ccnccccccevecs 4 20 6 Inter Tel GMX 48 And IMX 2448 Systems 2 2 2 ccc ccc cc ccc ccc cece ccens 4 21 A Hardware Requirements cccccccccccccccvccccscescvecscvees 4 21 B Hunt Group Programming ccccccecccccccccccccvcvceevecs 4 21 C Message Waiting Notification
15. AXXESS system 4 32 ESP system 4 20 GLX Plus system 4 29 GMX 152D system 4 27 GMX 48 system 4 24 IMX 1224 2460 system 4 20 IMX 2448 system 4 24 Call progress detection timer 3 54 Call progress dialtone duration timer 3 55 Call progress dialtone wait timer 3 55 Call routing announcement 2 2 2 5 3 17 3 20 digit translation 2 5 3 18 3 21 3 22 setup instructions 4 7 digit translation 4 8 playback device 4 7 Call in progress dialtone timer 3 55 Camp on tones 256 832 port systems 4 15 AXXESS system 4 31 ESP system 4 19 GLX Plus system 4 29 GMX 152D system 4 26 GMX 48 system 4 23 IMX 1224 2460 system 4 19 IMX 2448 system 4 23 Capacities 1 2 Check box 3 5 COM port 3 12 Command button 3 4 Computer applications PC 1 3 beep tones 5 8 hard disk 1 19 motherboard setup 1 19 programming PC 1 4 troubleshooting 5 8 Custom recordings 2 4 2 5 2 18 3 46 3 48 capacities 1 2 Customer Support 5 9 INDEX Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE NN ACA NN NN NN D Database passwords 3 66 programming menu window 3 15 save restore 3 63 3 67 update 3 15 Date 3 63 Day mode 3 63 3 65 DB25 connector 1 17 3 10 DB9 connector 1 7 Defective unit return policy 5 9 Deleting messages 2 12 Diagnostics 1 3 Diagnostics terminal 1 3 1 5 troubleshooting 5 3 Dial rules 4 4 automated attendant 4 5 automated attendant recall des
16. Create a hunt group arrangement like the one de 2 scribed in the programming example below In the example the station circuits for extension numbers 112 113 114 and 115 are connected to four ports of an IVX500 The hunt group ar rangement is programmed as follows a Station Programming Individual Station In formation Miscellaneous Information window e Extension number 112 Designate ex tension number 113 as the secretarial in tercept e Extension number 113 Designate ex tension number 114 as the secretarial in tercept e Extension number 114 Designate ex tension number 115 as the secretarial in tercept e Extension number 115 Do not desig nate a secretarial intercept The following programming steps must also be completed in the telephone system database a System Configuration window The IDC cir cuits connected to the TVX500 must be pro grammed as OPX circuits b Station Programming Individual Station Programming Special Purpose Station Programming window When programming each single line circuit that will be attached to the IVX500 designate the circuit as a voice mail station INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE c Station Programming Individual Station Programming Miscellaneous Information window Assign the extension number of the Quick Message Retrieval portas the alternate message source for each of the IVX500 ports in the hunt gro
17. O minutes O seconds O minutes O seconds O minutes O seconds gram Description command button The following win dow appears Enter the desired description up to 20 characters and select the OK command button Or se lect the Cancel command button to leave the description unchanged 13 9 OK CANCEL When finished select the OK command button Or to exit without saving any changes select the Cancel command button ita atada CASAR A ronal RR oD RR ON eR Page 3 48 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE oe eae O RS secre on Beer ee nee Sie SLR aA Total Storage Available on the System Total Storage Used Total Storage Remaining C DISK USAGE STATISTICS 13 10 This window appears when Disk Usage Statis tics is highlighted and the Program command button is selected as shown on page 3 46 The report includes the following information e Total Storage Available on the System This is the amount of disk space available on the system e Total Storage Used This is the disk space that has been used by the applications FEB 14 1995 FEB 14 1995 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 AS ets APPS es rs nesta ne e e eee O O ee peg 2 O hours O minutes O hours O minutes O hours O minutes e Total Storage Remaining This is the amount of disk space remaining in the IVX500 System If the disk is nearly full you can increase disk space by clearing mailbox messages If a
18. Refer to FEATURES page 2 3 sponding properly DTMF tones not being inter If numbers appear to be misdialed frequently due preted correctly see NOTE to trunk noise or other problems use the digit below translation feature as described on page 2 5 in FEATURES and page 3 21 in PROGRAMMING Consult Inter Tel Customer Support to determine if the DTMF detection delay timers need some adjustment See PROGRAMMING page 3 54 Automated attendant station s must be designated in the database Refer to PROGRAMMING pages 3 17 and 3 46 Defective VPC or hard disk Replace the defective PC component NOTE Due to the natural characteristics of the CO trunk the volume level of DTMF tones transmitted over the trunk may be substantially reduced before reaching the telephone system This natural degradation in tone volume may ad versely affect the reliability of the automated attendant feature Other factors which can affect automated attendant performance are CO trunk noise the quality of the recording and the quality and strength of the DTMF tones generated by the calling phone itself SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION Automated attendant not re Programming error Ensure desired trunks in day and or night mode ceiving incoming calls call are programmed to ring in directly to the proper ers routed to primary atten automated attendant ext number See FEATURES dant instead page 2 3 and APPLICATION amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SE
19. The custom recording is as signed to the Call Routing Announcement application as described on page 3 21 A caller who listens to the Call Routing Announcement recording can then dial the single digit location number to reach the designated destination For example ifthe hunt group extension for a customer support group is programmed for digit 3 the recording should say something like Dial 3 for cus tomer support NOTE Digit translation is not recommended when the application will be used as a hunt group announcement or overflow station on telephone systems in which the hunt group calls can be pulled away from the announce ment overflow station when a hunt group member be comes available For an alternate method of using digit translation in hunt groups refer to the manual for your telephone system Page 2 6 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FEATURES Issue 1 August 1994 4 VOICE MAIL 4 1 The Voice Mail feature allows callers to send and receive recorded messages from any station or DTMF telephone Dial pulse signaling is not recognized by the IVX500 System Callers using dial pulse phones will be routed to the IVX500 System Operator Access Destination for assistance 4 2 Twotypes of applications are combined to provide the Voice Mail feature Non Subscriber Voice Mail and Quick Message Retrieval e Non Subscriber Voice Mail This application han dles all calls that are directed
20. Voice Processing Card VPC 1 3 illustration 1 14 1 15 installation 1 6 Voice prompts installation 1 17 troubleshooting 5 6 Voice talk 3 53 4 3 4 4 256 832 port systems 4 12 4 15 4 17 4 21 ESP system 4 19 GMX 48 system 4 23 IMX 1224 2460 system 4 19 IMX 2443 system 4 23 Voice talk feedback timer 3 56 W Wall mount shelf 1 5 Warranty ix Windows how to use 3 3 multiple 3 5 Page I 6
21. back to step 4 The system prompts you to re cord your directory name 6 After the tone record your first and last name When finished press t 7 Press again to accept the name Or press 1 to replay the name you just recorded 2 to add to your message al to erase and re record it S A prompt plays that introduces you to basic Voice Mail features 4 33 Once your mailbox is initialized you may use any of the mailbox features provided To record a per sonal greeting or to change your password or directory name refer to paragraph 4 37 on page 2 14 Page 2 11 FEATURES Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES 1VX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Listening To Messages 4 34 There are two types of voice mail messages New Messages are messages that you have not yet heard including Broadcast Messages from the Sys tem Administrator and system sent messages They are played in the order they were received except that messages marked priority are played first Some special messages that may be played include the following Message receipt If a certified message is sent a system message will be played when the recipi ent has listened to the message Security violation The voice mail system has an extra security measure built in which informs a subscriber after they have logged into their mailbox whenever three invalid attempts have been made to access their mailbox with
22. program planning sheet for this window is located in Figure 3 7 on page 3 72 12 2 MAILBOXES PROGRAM The list box shows all existing mailboxes To program a mailbox highlight it and then select the Program command but ton A window appears as on page 3 39 123 CREATE MAILBOX CHANGE MAILBOX NUMBER To create a mailbox select Create Mailbox To change an existing mailbox number highlight it and select Change Mailbox Number The window shown on the next page appears NOTE If you create a mailbox for an extension that currently has an extension ID the system converts the eee BE fate ve xe oe Y 2 P E ee ARSS Cr ee j Z ee e i RS 2 7 Zana Paces Se Ses erate Bes ED Piers se i ID into a mailbox and eliminates the ID If already ini tialized the password and recorded name for the exten sion ID are retained and transferred over to the mailbox and the subscriber does not need to re initialize 12 4 BATCH CREATE MAILBOX To create sev eral mailboxes simultaneously select the Batch Create Mailboxes command button An Enter Range window appears as Shown on page 3 36 12 5 DELETE MAILBOXES To delete one ore more mailboxes from the system select the Delete Mailboxes command button A window appears as shown on page 3 37 12 6 CLEAR MAILBOX MESSAGES Cannot be used in stand alone programming To erase existing mailbox messages select the Clear Mailbox Messages command button The window on page 3 38 appear
23. recorded directory name or if no recording has been made the mailbox number XXX is not available prompt The caller can then record a message Page 2 20 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FEATURES Issue 1 August 1994 5 13 If the caller is using the Automated Attendant feature and accepts the name the caller is transferred to the selected destination station or mailbox if it is avail able If a station extension is dialed and the destination is not available the caller is sent to the associated mail box if one exists C REQUESTING ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 5 14 After a name is selected from the directory the caller has the option of requesting additional informa tion When requested mailbox number extension num ber and name are played if the number is not private and or unlisted 5 15 Individual mailboxes and extension IDs can be programmed as Private in database programming A Private number is included in the directory and can be dialed by a caller who knows the number but the associated mailbox and extension number information are not available to the caller only the name is played 5 16 Mailboxes and extension IDs can also be pro grammed as Unlisted That means that the number will not be included in the directory but can be dialed if the caller knows the extension number D USING THE DIRECTORIES 5 17 TO USE A DIRECTORY 1 Dial the Voice Mail acce
24. rules set it to Quick Message Retrieval if the telephone system does not have voice computer hunt group Enable the Remote Messaging Lamp Notification option If desired change the Number of Rings Before Answer field Systems without Voice Computer Hunt Groups If desired program the single line cir cuit connected to Quick Message Retrieval port as the only member of a hunt group in the tele phone system 5 6 Page 4 9 APPLICATION amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 Systems with Voice Computer Hunt Groups If the telephone system has voice computer hunt group capabilities the single line circuits con nected to the IVX500 ports can be placed in a voice computer hunt group that uses dial rules Follow the instructions for your specific tele phone system located in this chapter For addi tional information regarding dial rules also refer to page 4 4 When programming the dial rules for the voice computer hunt group use the fol lowing format XXX RE 1 H vanua In place of the XXX use the number that is pro grammed for the Quick Message Retrieval ap plication in the IVX500 System in step 1 not the telephone system extension number of the single line circuit connected to the ports In the telephone system assign the Quick Mes sage Retrieval extension or pilot number as the alternate message source for all of the single line circuits connected to the IVX500 ports Test
25. select the OK command button to exit Or se lect the Cancel command button to exit without saving any changes Page 3 25 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Day Mode 9 32 Each port is programmed separately using this window It is displayed when you highlight a port and select the Program command button shown on the pre ceding page 9 33 PORT OPERATION This drop down list box allows you to select the port operation Possible port op erations include the following e Applications Used for telephone systems without voice computer hunt groups The list includes all programmed applications If a port is assigned to an application the type of application will determine the operation of the port e Voice Computer Hunt Group For use with tele phone systems with voice computer hunt groups only This port operation assignment indicates that the port is a member of a voice computer hunt group on the telephone system Its operation is controlled by the commands sent from the telephone system Refer to the APPLICATION AND TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP section for detailed explanations of the dial rules needed to control these ports e None This assignment is for unused ports Port Operation Remote Messaging Lamp Notification Number of Rings Before Answer Range 1 10 Night Mode 934 REMOTE MESSAGING LAMP NOTIFI CATION If remote messaging
26. the number will be considered invalid even ifa non associated mailbox with that number exists Miscellaneous System Data AF If all mail boxes and extension IDs on the IVX500 are marked as associated and match the extension numbers in the telephone system enable the Voice Mailbox Number Validation flag G CALL FORWARDING 6 16 Users can have calls sent to their voice mailboxes by using the call forwarding feature to send calls to the hunt group pilot number The proper mailbox number is automatically dialed when the IVX500 answers the for warded call 6 17 When a call is forwarded to the hunt group it may have to try more than one port before reaching one that is available If the number of day night rings is changed to more than one ring in the IVX500 database the IVX500 will need enough time to search for an avail able port and allow the number of day night rings at the selected port before the Forward No Answer timer ex pires and the KSU retrieves that call Ensure that the fol lowing timer is set long enough to allow the IVX500 time to answer the call Timer Values AB Ensure that the Forward No Answer timer is programmed to be longer than the time it takes the call to ring at multiple ports in the Non Subscriber Voice Mail hunt group while searching for an available port H OUTSIDE CALLS 6 18 If the IVX500 is programmed to place outside calls the TVX500 circuits cannot be programmed to use Autom
27. the system s extension IDs this option will not be provided Refer to page 2 20 for directory informa tion e Dial the operator access destination If the caller needs further assistance dialing O will access the IVX500 System s programmed operator destina tion Or if the caller is on a rotary telephone and can not enter a digit the call will be automatically trans ferred to the operator destination The operator access destination is programmed as described on page 3 63 There can be separate destinations for day and night modes NOTE Due to the natural characteristics of the trunk the volume level of DTMF tones transmitted over the trunk may be substantially reduced before reaching the telephone and voice mail systems This natural degrada tion in tone volume may adversely affect the reliability of the Automated Attendant feature Other factors which can affect automated attendant performance are trunk noise and the quality and strength of the DTMF tones generated by the off premises phone itself A AUTOMATED ATTENDANT APPLICATIONS 2 4 There are a number of different uses for this fea ture Here are two examples e Direct ring in calls to a busy attendant could be for warded to an automated attendant using the Secre tarial Intercept Call Forward If Busy or System For warding features of the telephone system o The Automated Attendant s extension number can be programmed in the telephone system to rec
28. they can simply wait off hook camp on until the port is available To prevent the camp on tones from being sent to the IVX500 perform the following data base programming APM Programming Program all the IVX500 circuits to disallow call waiting tones C CALL FORWARDING 8 4 Users can forward calls to the voice mail system but their mailboxes will not automatically be dialed The caller will hear the main system greeting and must dial the desired mailbox number Users must forward calls to the extension number of the Non Subscriber Voice Mail application If they use the extension num ber of any other type of application they will not be able to reach the voice mailbox D HUNT GROUP ARRANGEMENT 8 5 Call forwarding can be used to create a hunt group type arrangement for the single line ports of the IVX500 With this arrangement callers will automati cally be forwarded to the other voice mail port when one port is busy On each single line circuit connected to the IVX500 do the following e Temporarily connect a single line set to the station circuit NOTE If using a DC ringing single line set it will ring continuously whenever on hook This is normal and will not affect off hook programming procedures e Lift the handset and dial the call forwarding destina tion feature code 04 Then enter the intercom number of the other voice mail port 20 or 21 and hang up e Lift the handset dial the call forwarding feature
29. tion 12 50 OK When you are finished viewing the report select the OK command button to exit Page 3 45 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 Windows Preferences Exit INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE ee CS Ii or ee ETL Cee ERA ES ee ae Fae o E DS see es AO E 5 Custom ames Disk Usage Statistics Remote Notification Tables Subscriber Summary Statistics Telephone System Interface Timers 13 MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION e 13 1 The following information can be programmed and reports viewed using this window A program plan ning sheet is located in Figure 3 8 on page 3 73 e Automated Attendant Information Enable disable the directory and or determine whether the directory is sorted by first or last name The window is shown on the next page e e Custom Recordings Program descriptions for Cus tom Recordings 01 50 The window is shown on page 3 48 o e Disk Usage Statistics Display a report that shows the status of the disk storage The window is shown on page 3 49 ende ee a es ae ae inact Subscriber Summary Statistics Display a report that shows mailbox statistics for all mailboxes com bined The window is shown on page 3 52 Telephone System Interface This option allows you to program the telephone system information that will be used by the IVX500 System The win dow is shown on page 3 53 Timers Program the system and voice processing timers that are used
30. 1 8 Two Port Voice Processing Card VPC oooooooooooo ooo Figure 1 9 Serial Parallel Port Combination Card SPC ooooooo PROGRAMMING Figure 3 1 Application Statistics Report Sample oooooooooomo o Figure 3 2 Directory Listing Report Samples ooooo oooooooooooo o Figure 3 3 Group List Report Sample voces a se ane een Figure 3 4 Application And Port Programming APP Or PORT Figure 3 5 Extension ID Programming EXT Or EXTID Figure 3 6 Group List Programming GROUP GRP Or GL Figure 3 7 Mailbox Programming MAIL Or MB o oooooooooo o Figure 3 8 Miscellaneous Programming MISC o oooooooooooooo o Figure 3 9 Report Programming REP ccc eee cee ee ee teens Figure 3 10 System Maintenance SYS Or MAINT 2002 e ee eee ees TROUBLESHOOTING Figure 5 1 Troubleshootine Chart ariadna REPLACEMENT PARTS Figure 6 1 Replacement Pans ci as Page vii PAGE 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 3 61 3 62 3 62 3 68 3 70 3 71 3 72 3 73 3 76 3 77 6 1 FCC REGULATIONS Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FCC REGULATIONS IMPORTANT 1 The Voice Processing Board complies with Part 68 of the U S Federal Communications Commission FCC rules On this board is a label that contains the FCC registration number and ring
31. 20 PROGRAMMING 6196 ei h 95 0 553 54 49096425 Aa 3 1 La INTOCUCHON BATA RA oe Dao de ee see ees 3 2 2 Plan The Programming Session varita dE 3 2 3 MACTOSOLL WINdOWS iii a 3 2 4 How To Use The Programming Windows ooooooooomooom o 3 3 5 Using The Help Vta ed as ase 3 6 6 System Set Up For Programming ooooooo o oo oo ree E ee ee 3 8 7 Inter Tel Logo Window idas 3 14 8 Database Programming Menu Window oooooooococcoorororormnmononos 3 15 9 Applications Programming 0 0 9 6 sede cere es deve a A ER 3 17 10 Extension ID Programming ei A 4 atv MAA Oe ws 3 27 Te SOU ISS is bet E E E eae eee eae 3 31 122 Mailbox Procramm ing soe idad da ltd acer baie 3 35 13 Miscellaneous Information scsi deka i obs ews 3 46 14 TREOOUS sa ee en aed ae bao E on eae ae ee need aa ea ees 3 58 15 System Manten dice da 3 63 R TEL PRACTICES TABLE OF CONTENTS INTE Issue 1 August 1994 IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE CONTENTS TELEPHONE SYSTEM INTERFACE INSTRUCTIONS e AIMROGUCHIODE sio dass Using Voice Computer Hunt Groups And Voice Talk ooo oo Application Setup Instructions cee cece ec eee eee tee een se eees Inter Tel And Premier 256 And 416 832 Port Systems o o o f Inter Tel IMX 1224 2460 And Premier ESP Systems oo oooo oo Inter Tel GMX 48 And IMX 2448 Systems 0 cee ccc cece cc eee Inter lel GM
32. 500 32 Milliseconds 16 240 32 Milliseconds 16 240 60 Hundredths 1 100 e OK CANCEL When the timer is programmed cor rectly select the OK command button Or to exit without changing the timer select the Cancel com mand button 13 30 OK CANCEL When finished programming all timers select the OK command button Or to exit without saving any changes select the Cancel command button 13 31 The following timers can be programmed for the system e Busy Tone Cycle Detect This is the minimum num ber of cycles of tone the system needs to recognize busy do not disturb or reorder tones sent from the telephone system When the system does not recog nize one of these tones it will assume the call is an swered For proper tone detection refer to page 3 53 to ensure that the system is programmed to in terface with the proper telephone system The range for this timer is 1 60 cycles The default is 2 cycles e Call Progress Detection This determines the maxi mum length of time the system will wait for a call to be answered before aborting the attempted call If it detects anything other than silence during this time the system will consider the call answered The range for this timer is 1 6000 hundredths of a second 1 1909 to 60 seconds The default is 4000 hundredths 40 seconds Page 3 54 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE e Call Progress Dialtone Duration This indicates the minimum d
33. 9 3 2 The following IVX500 PC and or applications problems are outlined in Figure 5 1 on pages 3 3 to 5 7 Page 5 2 Telephone system unable to communicate with IVX500 PC Programming PC unable to communicate with IVX500 PC ASCII type programming terminal unable to com municate with IVX500 PC e Unable to access desired voice IVX500 application e When power is turned on the IVX500 PC does not boot up properly e Automated attendant not responding properly e Automated attendant not receiving incoming calls callers routed to primary attendant instead Automated attendant indicates that an extension number is invalid even though it exists on the tele phone system Automated attendant transfers calls directly to voice mail without trying the extension number first Unable to record any voice mail greetings or mes sages and or unable to hear any voice prompts e Voice processing applications are slow Both internal and remote users have no message no tification after receiving voice messages in their mailboxes Audio volume levels from TVX500 applications are too low or too high e No audio from IVX500 applications e Station has message waiting indication from voice mail but associated mailbox has no message When an automated attendant recall is transferred to a mailbox the person s directory name is not played e Outside callers bypass main system greeting e The IVX500 PC date and or t
34. A Sd oe CUADO CI ROS oooO OG O Peas ah 2 Noufication tab ae SY Bas E 638 8 eR SIRIA Ada ORAR ACA A A A RNA iti mime Bang TIN A as Le s O A R OR SO A R REO PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 RASCA RRA SA SAS RUI SO Ra steers EE ER tee Pratt Description Pager Notification Strings Pager Answer Pager LCD Number Display Pager Termination Outgoing Access Strings Outgoing Access Outgoing Access Termination 13 15 This window appears when a Remote Notifica tion table has been selected for programming as de scribed on the preceding page 13 16 DESCRIPTION Enter a description of up to 20 characters in the Description text box 13 17 PAGER NOTIFICATION STRINGS Valid entries for all of the Pager Notification Strings include any digit 0 9 P for pause and You can enter up to 18 characters Also if you wish to have the pager show the number of the mailbox that placed the call you can use an M in the dial string For example if the Pager LCD Number Display is programmed as 9619000 M and a pager call is placed by mailbox number 1234 the pager display would show 9619000 1234 If you enter an invalid number you will see a warning message Press OK to continue and make a valid entry e PAGER ANSWER In this text box enter up to 18 digits that the paging company requires prior to re ceiving the pager LCD number and the pager ter mination code e PAGER LCD NUMBER DISPLAY Enter the tele
35. B Digit Translation o o eoooonoorororrrnrrcrororssossroo 2 5 4 Voice Mail E ere er ee O 2 7 A Mailboxes ee ee ee ee a os 2 8 Bs Group LASS cion A es 2 8 C Internal Message Notification o oooooooomormmcoscoscrcsoroso 2 9 D Remote Message Notification o Os 2 10 E Subscriber Use Of Voice Mail ore ee siessen 2l F Non Subscriber Use Of Voice Mail A er 2 16 G System Administrator Features A Diab e eee Oa ewees eee 2 17 5 Directories Automated Attendant Call Routing Announcement And Voice Mail O Sew E A E ree eT re UA 2 20 A Locating A Name oooooooconooococrsoscosccosonoso aaa 2 20 B Accepting A Name oooooooooooooooocooooooooo US 2 20 C Requesting Additional Information o E 2 21 D Using The Directories ooooooooooooooorosoooooso E EA 2 21 Page 2 1 FEATURES Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 The Inter Tel IVX500 System can contain up to 25 of the following applications Each application is de scribed in detail in this chapter e Automated Attendant The automated attendant is a programmable feature that can be used to provide automated call answering service Calls can transfer forward or directly ring in to an automated atten dant When an automated attendant answers a call it plays a recording that gives diali
36. BY LAST NAME Directory Description Number EATON NORMA 100 FONTANA MARK 272 GOODMAN ARTHUR 242 HARRIS MARK 216 LAB LAB 200 LINEN TODD 215 DIRECTORY LISTING BY DIRECTORY NUMBER Directory Notification Number Station 100 100 200 215 100 216 100 242 272 101 Date xx xx xxxx Notification Station Mailbox U 101 x 100 P 100 X 100 P U Date XX XX XXXX Notification __ Station _ Mailbox 100 X 101 X U 100 P 100 P U Date XX XX XXXX ailbox Description EATON NORMA LAB LAB U LINEN TODD HARRIS MARK GOODMAN ARTHUR FONTANA MARK a A AE ee FIGURE 3 3 GROUP LIST REPORT SAMPLE eee GROUP LIST REPORT Group List Number xxx Name description Mailboxes xxx XXX Date xx xx xxxx subscriber description subscriber description Page 3 62 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Baud Rate 15 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE 15 1 This window is displayed when System Mainte nance is selected from the programming options menu It is used for programming the dial 0 operator destina tion for the Voice Mail and Automated Attendant ap plications where calls are sent if the caller presses 0 for setting the time and date for setting the baud rate of the COM port programming passwords and for saving restoring the database A program planning sheet is lo cated in Figure 3 10 on page 3 77 15 2 DATE The current date is shown in the Date text box If necessary enter a new dat
37. CALL IS PLACED TO QUICK MESSAGE RETRIEVAL APPLICATION Alternate Message Source for IVX500 ports Station user is prompted for the password to his mailbox 4 3 Station users and outside callers gain access to the Voice Mail application in the following ways e By dialing the telephone number or extension num ber assigned to the Non Subscriber Voice Mail ap plication e By being transferred to the Non Subscriber Voice Mail application by the automated attendant e By being forwarded to the Non Subscriber Voice Mail application when a called station is unavailable e By responding to message waiting indications and reaching the Quick Message Retrieval application 4 4 All Voice Mail users hear recorded instructions that tell them what to do next Users simply listen to the prompts and press the keypad key that corresponds to the desired choice If the user does not respond immedi ately a second set of prompts is played 4 5 Most prompts are interruptible and users can press the desired key at any time during the prompt The prompt will then stop and the system will act on the re quested choice Page 2 7 FEATURES Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE A MAILBOXES 4 6 A mailbox is a storage location on the IVX500 PC hard disk which stores all messages that have been di rected to it The hard disk also stores prompts greet ings and special programming Each S
38. F1 gt If Any Error Enabled t 3 Page 1 20 Boot Up Numlock Status on Boot Up Floppy Seek Enabled Boot Sequence Az Ca Turbo SW Function Enable Yes External Cache Disabled CPU Internal Cache Enabled Security Option Setup Video BIOS Shadow Disabled C8 CFFFF Shadow Disabled DS9O0O D7FFF Shadow Disabled D8000 DFFFF Shadow Disabled Virus Warning Disabled IDE HDD Block Mode Disabled Auto Configuration Enabled DRAM Speed Fastest Cache Write Cycle W S Cache Burst Read W S AT Bus Clock 1 4 CLK W TROUGH External Cache WB WT W BACK Internal Cache WB WT Video Shadow Cacheable Disabled System Shadow Cacheable Disabled Latch Local Bus T3 NOTE Be sure to set the Boot Sequence field to A C the External Cache field to Disabled and the CPU Internal Cache field to Enabled INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION Issue 1 August 1994 13 Ensure that all of the fields are set similar to 14 15 16 17 those shown in the preceding samples If not use the up or down arrow keys to highlight the de sired field then use the PG UP or PG DN keys to change the setting Press the ESC key to exit The monitor again displays the main menu of options Use the up or down arrow keys to highlight the ADVANCED CHIPSET SETUP option and press ENTER twice The monitor displays the Advanced CMOS Setup screen Depending on the specific
39. Group List Report Yes or No Directory Sort Order Last Name or First Name Directory Sort Order Last Name or First Name Page 3 76 INTER TEL PRACTICES PROGRAMMIN G IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 FIGURE 3 10 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE SYS OR MAINT Dial 0 Destination a ee Extension or Mailbox or None Extension or Mailbox or None INFORMATION Passwords PASSWORD TYPE PASSWORD Database Restricted Database Unrestricted Page 3 77 INTER TEL PRACTICES APPLICATION amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 CONTENTS PAGE Ae ARO UCR rai AA son bbe seca saws 4 3 2 Using Voice Computer Hunt Groups And Voice Talk ccecceceees 4 3 A How Do Voice Computer Hunt Groups Work o ooooooomo 4 3 B What Do The Dial Rules Do ooooooooooooooorooonososrsss 4 4 E What Is Voice Talk aia aa 4 4 3 Application Setup Instructions oooooooooooooroororoororo ros 4 5 A Automated Attendant ccccccccccsccccccccccccccccccsccccscece 4 5 B Automated Attendant Recall Destination ooooooooooo 4 6 C Call Routing Announcement cccccccccccccccesccccccccccce 4 7 D Quick Message Retrieval ooomoommm oro porporoor9r9oproososs 4 9 E Non Subscriber Voice Mail ooooooooooooomorooosroroso 4 10 4 Inter Tel And Premier 256 And 416 832 Port Systems oooooooooo 4 12
40. Industry standard 25 pair cable for connecting the terminal block to the single line card in the tele phone system 50 pin female amphenol type connector with rec ommended non conducting plastic cover and a connecting machine Assemble The Optional Equipment PC wall mount shelf accommodates most PC mod els refer to page 6 2 in REPLACEMENT PARTS Parallel printer for producing various reports ASCII type programming terminal for diagnostics and if necessary for loading voice prompts only External modem for the IVX500 PC and internal or external modem for the programming PC Page 1 5 SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION Issue 1 August 1994 TEL PRACTICES INTER IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE B HARDWARE INSTALLATION NOTICE Personal computer PC technology is continually evolving As it does the Inter Tel IVX500 PC will continue to incorporate important design enhance ments Thus depending on the actual version of equipment that is shipped the following installa tion instructions could vary somewhat If revised instructions are included with the equipment refer to the new information instead 6 6 Install the VX500 PC as outlined in the following steps See Figures 1 2 and 1 3 on pages 1 9 and 1 10 for sample diagrams of the assembled PC NOTE Like the telephone system itself the IVX500 PC must have its own isolated dedicated properly grounded AC circuit fo
41. LED and LCD message waiting indications when they receive voice mail messages perform the following telephone system programming Station Data Specific Station Information DAA O Assign each of the IVX500 port intercom numbers with a user name of V MAIL or some other similar identifying name e Assign each IVX500 port as a voice mail sta tion 7 6 The following programming must be completed in the IVX500 database to allow the IVX500 to leave mes sage waiting notifications at the stations Station Data Specific Station Information DAA Assign the circuit connected to the Quick Message Retrieval application as the alternate message source for all of the IVX500 ports in the hunt group 7 7 To ensure that the subscribers have easy access to their voice mail messages when responding to message waiting notifications program the following Applications Programming Port Programming Port Configuration window Enable Remote Messaging Lamp Notification Enable any or all of the IVX500 ports for Remote Messaging Lamp Notification This allows them to turn on the message waiting indications at stations in the telephone system and to place outgoing calls D MESSAGE CENTER 7 8 The IVX500 Non Subscriber Voice mail applica tion can be programmed to act as the message center for stations Then when an intercom caller calls a station that is busy or unavailable he or she can choose to leave a message at the c
42. NOTE On the AXXESS System the Call Initiation code must be P to function correctly with the TVX500 System 13 27 OK CANCEL When telephone system inter face programming is complete select the OK command button To exit without changing any information select the Cancel command button Page 3 53 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 sete Sop aes meters nea es AOS SES SAS ee Bes erie we o TA Bia A Call Progress D TE Call Progress Dialtone Duration Call Progress Dialtone Wait Call in progress Dialtone Dialed Pause Duration DTMF Delay DTMF Detect Hookflash Duration G TIMERS 13 28 This window appears when Timers is high lighted and the Program command button is selected as shown on page 3 46 13 29 TIMER PROGRAM To program a timer highlight it in the list box and select the Program com mand button The following window appears Unit Minutes Range 1 255 e VALUE Enter the desired value for the timer with in the valid range as shown e DEFAULT To return the timer to default value se lect the Default command button The button shows the default value ES ed ELA q AE AEREA ROS eee eos ities Anas RS IS iz LEE CLLEGE AAA e ds gee al INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE ey oes a Sits oy os Lied Es SITO ER REA ie LIRIOS Ly Le ee LE LESS LEE Be NESSES Gee Ee tee es E a NO NAO 4000 Hundredths 4 6000 2 Seconds 1 5 5 Seconds 1 10 2 Seconds 0 5 Hundredths 1
43. Notification Tables see page 3 50 for programming information Select the drop down list box and scroll the highlight bar to the desired Remote Notification Table 12 35 DAYS OF THE WEEK To determine for which days of the week notifications will be enabled se lect the Days of the Week command button The win dow shown on the next page appears Page 3 42 INTER TEL PRACTICES PROGRAMMING IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 12 36 DAYS OF THE WEEK Select the check box es for the desired day s The check marks show the selected days To remove a check mark select the check box again When finished select OK Or select Cancel to leave the days of the week unchanged 12 37 OK CANCEL When message notification 4 Tuesday programming is complete select the OK command but 7 ton Or to exit without saving any changes select the La Wednesday Cancel command button La Thursday Da Friday Saturday Page 3 43 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 TEPER EET OME Miscellaneous Mailbox Informal Maximum Mailbox Message Capacity min Default 30 Range 1 120 Maximum Non subscriber Message Length 5 min Default 5 Range 1 Capacity Maximum Outgoing Message Length min Default 5 Range 1 120 Recorded Name Length 0 seconds Primary Greeting Length 0 seconds Alternate Greeting Length 0 seconds Miscellaneous Mailbox Information Programming 12 38 This window appears when
44. System Interface window e System Type Select GLX Plus system type See page 3 53 in PROGRAMMING e Voice Talk The GLX Plus does not support the Voice Talk feature See page 3 53 in PROGRAMMING F SETTING THE DATE AND TIME 8 8 To ensure that the correct time is used by the IVX500 the following information is programmed in the IVX500 database System Maintenance window shown on page 3 63 in PROGRAMMING System Maintenance Enter current date and time or set it to match the programming PC Page 4 29 APPLICATIONS amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE 9 INTER TEL AXXESS SYSTEM 9 1 In order for the IVX500 to work properly with the Inter Tel AXXESS System the following installation and programming procedures must be performed A HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS 9 2 The IVX500 is installed like a single line set Single line sets are installed on Single Line Cards SLCs or are installed on Single Line Adapters SLAs which are connected to DKSC circuits The IVX500 must be configured for AC ringing 93 When connecting the IVX500 to the telephone system single line circuits do not include the second pair 30VDC and ground from the single line circuits The 30VDC from the single line circuits will damage the IVX500 PC B ANALOG VOICE MAIL HUNT GROUPS 9 4 The Analog Voice Mail feature must be enabled in Premium Feature Selection It requires 5
45. TONES 6 12 When callers hear busy signals when calling the IVX500 they can simply wait off hook camp on until the called port is available To prevent the camp on tones from being sent to the IVX500 perform the fol lowing database programming in the telephone system Station Data Specific Station Information DAA Program all the IVX500 circuits to disal low camp on tones 6 13 If Voice Talk is not enabled the Camp On timer must be adjusted to allow the IVX500 to recognize busy signals when placing a call Timer Values AB Change the Camp On timer to 10 seconds default is 3 seconds Page 4 23 APPLICATIONS amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE E TA ES NE TET ET AA F VALIDATED MAILBOX NUMBERS 6 14 This feature affects calls transferred to voice mail or placed through an automated attendant on the IVX500 If all mailbox numbers and extension IDs match extension numbers are associated the Vali date Voice Mailbox Numbers option should be enabled to allow the system to check that the number entered by the caller is valid If there are mailbox numbers that do not match an extension number non associated there is no need to validate and this option should be disabled 6 15 If the telephone system is programmed to validate voice mailbox numbers and the caller dials a number that does not have an associated mailbox on the IVX500
46. The range for this tim er is 1 5 seconds The default is 1 second Voice Talk Feedback When the system is con nected to a telephone system that support Voice Talk this determines the length of time the system will wait for each digit of the Voice Talk response from the telephone system The range for this timer is 1 30 seconds The default is 5 seconds INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE ee ee ee 5 A E A ees See RARO IR E BE AS i PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 eat PARR RRR eaten nae oe DO O ES Se es lt None gt ge i E se Enable Voice Mail Directory Directory Sort Order H VOICE MAIL INFORMATION 13 32 This window appears when Voice Mail In formation is highlighted and the Program command but ton is selected as shown on page 3 46 The voice mail parameters that are programmed in this window must be set up before the voice mail system is able to operate ef ficiently These parameters include defining a System Administrator s mailbox enabling or disabling the voice mail directory determining directory sorting or der and adjusting the audio volume Default values are shown in the window above 13 33 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR MAILBOX A System Administrator s mailbox is defined in order to record custom recordings for system applications created in Applications Programming send broadcast messages to all subscribers and perform Mailbox and Group List maintenanc
47. access the mailbox directory to locate and select the mail box See page 2 20 for directory instructions If you hear a subscriber s personal mailbox greeting skip this step 2 If the mailbox is full a prompt will notify you that it cannot receive messages However it will allow you to leave a message at another mailbox 3 4 Page 2 16 Leave your message with another subscriber or try again later After hearing the subscriber s greeting and a tone record your message To call the attendant press 0 To pause while recording press 2 A prompt will tell you that the recording has been stopped To continue press any key except 0 To erase and re record your message press 3 To cancel the recording and return to the main menu press If you exceed the maximum allotted time for mes sage length a prompt will notify you and allow you to re record the message or send it If Voice Mail is full a message will notify you that it cannot accept your message Hang up and try again later When you have completed your message you have the following options If you are satisfied with your message hang up OR press 4 for additional options and return to step 1 If you wish to hear your message press 1 If you wish to add to your message press 2 and continue your message as described in step 3 To erase and re record your message press 3 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLA
48. allowed to use the port to place outgoing calls for remote messaging and message waiting lamp notification purposes NOTE Ensure that ports with this option enabled have outgoing access for trunks in the telephone system if they will be used for remote notification to outside numbers Number Of Rings Before Answer This parameter indicates the number of ring cycles the system must detect before it will answer a call on this port By de fault it is set to one ring cycle The allowed range is 1 10 cycles INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE O O gaeraat Ta tate tatata tetetete 2 RRR gt NS e EEEO Jatate OS A Exit Help IIA SAA AS SERRANA 9 6 The window shown above appears when Applica tions Programming is selected from the programming options or the APP or PORT abbreviated command is entered It is used for creating programming and delet ing applications and for programming individual ports 9 7 APPLICATIONS The Applications list box shows the currently programmed applications if any When an application is highlighted you can use the Pro gram Application command button to program it 98 PROGRAM APPLICATION To program an existing application highlight it in the Applications list box and select the Program Application command but ton A window appears as shown on page 3 21 Applications ses O CERRAR eee PEERED oe SRO SSE OO ORR AA A E A PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 SR
49. an outside tele phone number This feedback allows the telephone sys tem and IVX500 to efficiently communicate about call progress 2 10 Extended DTMF tones can also be enabled They include codes for indicating when a station is forwarded to another station and when the calling party hangs up Page 4 4 mates INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE APPLICATION amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 3 A 3 1 APPLICATION SETUP INSTRUCTIONS AUTOMATED ATTENDANT The Automated Attendant application provides a standard automated call answering service for calls that it receives through transfers forwards and direct ring ins When the Automated Attendant answers a call it plays a greeting followed by a custom recording that gives dialing instructions The caller may then directly dial a station extension number application extension number or hunt group pilot number 3 2 To set up an Automated Attendant application follow these steps 1 2 6 Create the application using the programming window shown on page 3 19 Enter the desired extension number for the application do not use a number that is already assigned to another ap plication When the application programming window shown on page 3 21 appears enter a description for the application and select Custom Recording numbers for day and night modes The record ings will be made in step 10 Recording descr
50. are connected to four ports of an IVXS00 The hunt group ar rangement is programmed as follows a Station Data Specific Station Information DAA e Intercom number 112 Designate inter com number 113 as the secretarial inter cept e Intercom number 113 Designate inter com number 114 as the secretarial inter cept e Intercom number 114 Designate inter com number 115 as the secretarial inter cept e Intercom number 115 Do not desig nate a secretarial intercept e Designate the attendant as NONE for all IVX500 ports in the hunt group so that the cancel forward feature cannot be used 2 The following programming steps must also be 3 4 completed on the telephone system a Station Data Specific Station Information DAA e When programming each single line cir cuit that will be attached to the IVX500 designate the circuit as a voice mail sta tion e Assign the circuit connected to the Quick Message Retrieval application as the al ternate message source for all of the IVX500 ports in the hunt group Complete the following programming using a station instrument connected to the single line port that will be connected to the IVX500 circuit a Temporarily connect a single line set to the station circuit assigned the last station in the hunt group 115 in the example NOTE If using a DC ringing single line set it will ring continuously whenever on hook This is nor
51. by the applications The window is shown on page 3 54 Voice Mail Information Select the System Admin istrator s mailbox enable disable the voice mail di rectory determine the directory sort order and set the volume for voice mail prompts The window is shown on page 3 57 o Remote Notification Tables Determine the num 13 2 MISCELLANEOUS PROGRAMMING bers that will be dialed by the system for pager an PROGRAM To reach one of the options highlight it in swer LCD display pager termination and outgoing the list box and select the Program command button trunk access The window is shown on page 3 50 The windows are shown on the pages listed above Page 3 46 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE A AUTO ATTENDANT INFORMATION 13 3 This window appears when Auto Attendant In formation is highlighted and the Program command but ton is selected It is used for determining whether the automated attendant application will use the mailbox and extension ID directory and how the directory is sorted Default values are shown in the window above 13 4 ENABLE AUTO ATTENDANT DIRECTO RY To enable the directory select this check box to PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 eee sane Bie ee de SA oe eee EES nom A AA place a check mark in it To disable the directory select it again to remove the check mark 13 5 DIRECTORY SORT ORDER To determine whether the mailbox and extension ID descriptions in
52. contents are re placed with the new information You can erase the entire contents of a text box by highlighting the text and then pressing the backspace or delete key To overwrite the current information start entering new information 4 5 To correct mistakes made while entering informa tion or to erase existing information use the backspace or delete key and retype the entry 4 6 To select a text box follow the instructions in paragraph 4 2 When the cursor appears in the box you can begin typing 4 7 The system recognizes both upper and lower case characters When typing you may use either case or a combination B LIST BOX 4 8 The list box is used for several purposes as fol lows e Typed information When programming items such as timers the list box shows the current values Whenever an item in the list is re programmed the list box shows the new information e Include Exclude lists Some programs require you to list the applications mailboxes or extension IDs that are on include or exclude lists To move an item from one list to the other highlight the desired item and select the appropriate command button It is automatically moved or copied to the other list 4 9 There are several methods for highlighting a line in a list box They are as follows o Mouse To select an item simply place the mouse cursor on the desired item and double click the left button e Arrow keys Use the up o
53. date that the Equipment was shipped to the Buyer THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF AND EXCLUDES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THIS LIM ITED WARRANTY IN NO EVENT SHALL INTER TEL BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF TIME OR OTHER LOSSES INCURRED BY BUYER IN CONNECTION WITH THE PURPOSE POSSESSION OPERATION OR USE OF THE EQUIPMENT SUCH CLAIMS BEING EXPRESSLY WAIVED BY THE INSTALLING COMPANY For complete information on returning equip ment refer to the current Inter Tel Material Re turn Policy document part number 835 1065 This document includes specific information on the following subjects warranty procedures to follow when returning equipment equipment damaged in shipment insurance repair policy and advance replacement policy Page ix INTER TEL PRACTICES SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 a Se SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTALLATION CONTENTS PAGE 1 Introdo consi iia 1 2 2 Installation And Programming Outline oooooooooooomomoo o 1 2 3 System Capacities O meses ptas 1152 4 IVX500 System Specifications E 1 3 A PC Requirements EN 1 3 B Applications Software oooooooooo ASAS 1 3 C Audio
54. exten sion numbers For example if digit 1 is Transfer To Collected Extension callers can dial extension numbers that begin with 1 However if digit 1 is Transfer to extension 2000 a caller attempting to dial a station extension number that begins with 1 will instead be transferred to 2000 e Hang Up This action is used for Timeout only This disconnects from the call if the user does noten ter a digit 9 23 PROGRAM To program a digit 0 9 or Timeout highlight it in the list box and then select the Program command button The window shown on the next page appears 9 24 OK CANCEL When the digit translation table is complete select OK to return to the window shown on the previous page or select Cancel to exit without sav ing any changes Page 3 22 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Transfer Destination Mailbox Extension ice 9 25 For Digits The window shown above appears when you select the Program command button while a digit is highlighted e ACTION Scroll through the drop down list box to the desired Action for the digit being programmed NOTE If you select Transfer To Operator and there is not a programmed Operator Access Dial 0 Des tination in System Maintenance window see page 3 63 you will see a warning message Go to that window and program the Operator Access Destina tions eo TRANSFER DESTINATION If the Action is Transfer To Mailbox scroll t
55. for remote programming as described on page 3 10 Help The Help drop down menu allows access to the on line Help files as described on page 3 6 This drop down menu also includes an entry titled About Database Programming that when se lected displays the software part number and gen eration date If viewed after a remote programming session is started it will also show the software ver sion number System Programming System Services Help i INTEGRATED SYSTEMS Page 3 14 de a es INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Windows Exit Help PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 Programming Form Applications Port Programming Extension ID Programming Group List Programming Mailbox Programming Miscellaneous Information Report Programming system Maintenance 8 DATABASE PROGRAMMING MENU WINDOW 8 1 The Database Programming Menu window shown above allows access to all other programming areas 8 2 Each of the options is described in detail in this section For information regarding the IVX500 System its applications and its features refer to FEATURES A WINDOW HEADER COMMANDS 8 3 The window header contains three options Win dows Exit and Help The options can be selected by pressing ALT and the underlined letter W X or H The processes performed by these options are as follows e Windows This drop down menu is used for manag ing multiple windows and icons refer to pag
56. has voice computer hunt group capabilities the single line circuits con nected to the IVX500 ports can be placed in a voice computer hunt group that uses dial rules Follow the instructions for your specific tele phone system located in this chapter For addi tional information regarding dial rules also refer to page 4 4 When programming the dial rules for the voice computer hunt group use one of the following formats a If station users will be forwarding their sta tions to the Non Subscriber Voice Mail orifa chain of forwards could end at the Non Subscriber Voice Mail use this dial rule string lt XXX gt 4 8 1 H In place of the XXX use the number that is programmed for the Non Subscriber Voice Mail application in the IVX500 System in step 1 not the telephone system extension num ber of the single line circuit connected to the ports b If station users will not be forwarding to the Non Subscriber Voice Mail dial rule 4 is not needed Instead use this dial rule string EXXX gt 1 H In place of the XXX use the number that is programmed for the Non Subscriber Voice Mail application in the IVX500 System in step 1 not the telephone system extension num ber of the single line circuit connected to the ports If the customer wants calls to ring in directly to the Non Subscriber Voice Mail application pro gram the appropriate telephone system trunks to ring in to t
57. is located in Figure 3 4 on page 3 68 9 2 Applications can include the following refer to FEATURES for more information regarding each ap plication type o Automated Attendant The automated attendant is a programmable feature that can be used to provide automated call answering service Calls can be transferred forwarded or can directly ring in to an Automated Attendant application When an auto mated attendant answers a call it plays a recording that gives dialing instructions After hearing the re cording the caller may then directly dial a station extension number voice mail application number or hunt group pilot number e Automated Attendant Recall Destination If a call that was transferred by the Automated Attendant ap plication is not answered before the Transfer timer expires the call recalls the Automated Attendant Recall Destination application The recall destina tion announces that the station is unavailable and al lows the caller to choose to leave a message if a mailbox is programmed for that station or dial another extension number e Call Routing Announcement A Call Routing An nouncement application can be used in place of a playback device and or for one digit call routing The playback device function is especially useful for programming hunt group announcement and over flow stations When called the Call Routing An nouncement application will play a recording and then hang up As an option t
58. message the mes sage notification station is signaled by one of the IVX500 ports that is programmed for remote messag ing lamp notification If a keyset receives a message the MSG key is lit and the display shows that a message has been received A single line set will receive mes sage waiting signals if they are enabled in the telephone system database 4 15 Ifa message notification station has more than one associated mailbox the message indications MSG key lamp display and or message waiting tones will continue until all messages from all associated and un associated mailboxes have been heard However the display does not show which mailbox es received the message s only that the message waiting indications were received from voice mail When the Message No tification station user responds to the message using the feature code or key he or she will automatically enter the associated mailbox for the extension being used and hear the password prompt To retrieve a message from an unassociated mailbox the user must bypass the associated mailbox press and enter the correct unassociated mailbox number and password Or the user may dial the Voice Mail access number directly instead of responding to the message using a feature code or key to bypass the associated mailbox Page 2 9 FEATURES Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE D REMOTE MESSAGE NOTIFICATION 4 16 Rem
59. music on hold If it returns silence the IVX500 will hang up to complete the transfer when the IVX500 Call Progress Detection timer expires If the Call Progress Initiation timer is not set high enough this will cause the telephone system to send reorder tone which will in turn cause the IVX500 to connect the caller to the main greeting instead the station s mailbox greeting The Call Progress Detection timer must be set as described below to prevent the forwarded calls from reaching the main voice mail greeting If set correctly the caller will hear the selected mailbox greeting Set the following timer in the IVX500 database Miscellaneous Information Timers Set the Call Progress Detection timer to 12 seconds the IVX500 will hang up if nothing is detected with in 12 seconds H OUTSIDE CALLS 7 19 Tf the IVX500 is programmed to place outside calls the IVX500 circuits cannot be programmed to use LCR The IVX500 must be able to recognize outside dial tone when placing a call Station Data Specific Station Information DAA Ensure that the IVX500 circuits have the proper outgoing access and toll restrictions for placing calls Do not enable LCR Only toll re striction for the ports that will be used by the IVX500 for placing outside calls 7 20 Program the following in the IVX500 database Miscellaneous Information Remote Notifica tion Tables When programming the Remote No tification Tables use a trunk a
60. not use Control characters in the descriptions Message Notification Station Each mailbox should have a station that will receive message noti fication lamp message tones etc whenever the mailbox receives a message This is usually the same number as the mailbox However when a mailbox is shared by several stations or belongs to a hunt group pilot number a specific station must be designated to receive the message notification Mailbox Initialized The mailbox programming window has an indicator that shows whether the sub scriber mailbox owner has initialized the mailbox and recorded a name in the company directory Associated Mailbox If the mailbox is associated with a station or hunt group it should be marked in the database as associated With associated mail boxes the telephone system can validate mailbox numbers You must also enable a flag in the tele phone system see TELEPHONE INTERFACE for details Mailbox Type The mailbox can be programmed as a standard mailbox that can send and receive mes Sages or it can be a receive only mailbox In the default state it is a standard mailbox Remote Messaging If remote programming is en abled a mailbox can have primary and or alternate message notification that includes the following op tions Enable Notification Message notification to an intercom number or to an outside telephone number can be turned on or off without changing any of
61. oe z y ee 7 Sst o ee fotas onti o LS es OS fe ey Le 11 12 The windowshown above appears when the De lete Group Lists command button is selected To deter mine the group lists that will be deleted use the following procedure e ADD ALL Use the Add command button to move the highlighted group list from the Pick List to the Groups Lists To Delete list or use the All command button to place all group lists in the list e REMOVE NONE To remove a group list from the Page 3 34 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE as ees FEE A OIA LM GUE Lie che IEE SSA i ee Hae PORES oe O e ESAS TRIOS OS Groups To Delete List highlight it and select the Re move command button Or to remove all group lists use the None command button OK CANCEL When the Include List appears as desired select the OK command button A window appears that tells you that You are about to create delete group lists Do you wish to continue Select Yes to continue or No to leave the group lists un changed To exit without changing the lists select the Cancel command button INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Preferences Exit PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 Mailboxes E A aAA enana AR Wee epee PRU Re RR Bos a ee SD n gt Es PEREA es ee 12 MAILBOX PROGRAMMING 12 1 A mailbox is a storage location on the hard disk which stores all messages that have been directed to it A
62. page 3 19 Enter the desired extension number for the application do not use a number that is already assigned to another ap plication When the application programming window shown on page 3 21 appears enter a description for the application and select recording numbers for day and night modes The recordings will be made in step 8 Recording descriptions are pro grammed as shown on page 3 48 Select the Digit Translation command button and program the digit translation destinations as described on page 3 22 Also ensure that the Timeout timer is set to the desired value as described on page 3 23 If you used the action Transfer To Operator in your digit translation table refer to the System Maintenance window shown on page 3 63 Make sure that the Dial O Destinations for day and night mode are set to the correct extensions or mailboxes For stations to receive calls through the Call Routing Announcement application they must have a mailbox or extension ID programmed to match their telephone system extension number See page 3 35 for mailbox programming instructions and page 3 27 for extension ID pro gramming instructions Program the IVX500 ports as described on page 3 25 Set the Port Operation field to Voice Computer Hunt Group if the telephone system will be programmed to send voice computer dial rules set it to Call Routing Announcement if the telephone system does not have voice com puter hunt g
63. received by the TVXS00 the proper mailbox number is automatically dialed 5 17 When a call is forwarded to the Non Subscriber Voice Mail hunt group it may have to try more than one port before reaching one that is available If the number of day night rings field in the IVX500 database is changed to more than one ring the IVX500 will need enough time to search for an available port and allow the number of day night rings at the selected port before the Forward No Answer timer expires and the KSU re trieves that call Ensure that the following timer is set long enough to allow the IVX500 time to answer the call Timer Values AB Ensure that the Forward No Answer timer is programmed to be longer than the time it takes the call to ring at multiple ports in the Non Subscriber Voice Mail hunt group while searching for an available port H OUTSIDE CALLS 5 18 If the IVX500 is programmed to place outside calls the circuits connected to the IVX500 cannot be programmed to use Least Cost Routing LCR The IVX500 must be able to recognize outside dial tone when placing a call 5 19 Program the following in the telephone system database Station Data Specific Station Information DAA Ensure that the IVX500 circuits have the proper outgoing access and toll restrictions for placing calls Do not enable LCR Only toll re Striction for the ports that will be used by the IVX500 for placing outside calls 5 20 Program the
64. second soft ware disk 3 After the two beeps remove the first software disk insert Applications Software Disk 2 of 4 and wait for the files to be copied When fin ished the PC beeps three times every seven sec onds to indicate it is ready for the third disk NOTE If the wrong software disk is inserted the PC beeps for 1 5 seconds pauses for three seconds and then beeps the appropriate number of times to indicate which software disk should be inserted 4 After the three beeps remove the second soft ware disk insert Applications Software Disk 3 of 4 and wait for the files to be copied When fin ished the PC beeps four times every seven sec onds to indicate it is ready for the fourth disk S After the four beeps remove the third software disk insert Applications Software Disk 4 of 4 and wait for the files to be copied When fin ished the PC beeps for 1 5 seconds and then pauses for five seconds to indicate the installa tion is complete 6 After the installation is complete remove the last software disk The PC automatically re boots Voice Prompts 6 10 Should it become necessary to re install the voice prompts only e g because one or more of the prompts is garbled or incomplete follow the procedure below 1 Referring to the diagram below attach the DB9 to DB25 converter supplied with the data base programming cable kit to the DB9 COM1 serial port connector on the back of th
65. step 1 not the telephone system extension num ber of the single line circuit connected to the ports INTER TEL PRACTICES APPLICATION amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 nn NN ANNE Ee C CALL ROUTING ANNOUNCEMENT 3 4 ACall Routing Announcement application can used in in two ways e Playback device The playback device function is 4 especially useful for programming hunt group an nouncement and overflow stations When called the Call Routing Announcement application will play a recording and then hang up Setup instructions for this type of Call Routing Announcement application are shown below e Customized call routing with single digit transla tion As an option the Call Routing Announcement application can use Digit Translation This feature allows the caller to press a single digit for access to an extension a mailbox the voice mail subscriber application the operator the directory or to a station or hunt group that has an associated mailbox or ex tension ID Setup instructions for this type of Call Routing Announcement application are shown on the next page Playback Device Setup 3 5 Use the following procedure to set up a playback device Call Routing Announcement application 1 Create the application using the programming window shown on page 3 19 Enter the desired extension number for the application do not use 5 a number that is already a
66. the IVX500 System memory 6 36 To disconnect from the remote programming ses sion When the Inter Tel logo screen is displayed press F6 or press ALT S and then select Disconnect From Remote System from the System Services pull down menu E PASSWORD 6 37 At the beginning of each programming session the IVX500 System may prompt you for a password en ter the password if one is required and press RETURN When the Database Programming Menu displays on the PC monitor screen programming can then be com pleted as described in the following pages Page 3 13 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE 7 INTER TEL LOGO WINDOW 7 1 The logo window is the first window that is dis played in any programming session gt 7 2 The window header contains three options Sys tem Programming System Service and Help These op tions allow access to drop down menus and can be selected by pressing ALT and the underlined letter P S sl or H The processes performed by these options are as follows o System Programming This drop down menu in cludes Database Programming for beginning a pro gramming session described on page 3 10 On Line Monitor Programming reserved for future use and Modem Programming described on page 3 11 System Services This drop down menu includes Connect To Remote System and Disconnect From Remote System options which are used
67. the Auto Attendant information Incoming calls This shows the total number of calls received by that extension number This is shown as a combined total for Call Routing An nouncement applications Outgoing calls These are the remote message notification calls placed by the IVX500 System ports Connect minutes This shows the total time spent on incoming and outgoing calls if any com bined This is shown as a combined total for Call Routing Announcement applications Minutes per call This is the average amount of time spent on each call in minutes and seconds Page 3 58 This is shown as a combined total for Call Rout ing Announcement applications Transfers to Operator This shows the number of times a caller within Voice Mail or Auto Atten dant presses the dial pad key O for operator ac cess Voice Mail messages left This appears in the summary section only It shows how many voice mail messages were left in all mailboxes com bined Port statistics This portion includes data on the activity of all applications combined It shows in 30 minute segments the total number of min utes and seconds that all of the ports were busy simultaneously The detailed segments begin at 07 00 AM and conclude at 06 00 PM The Off Peak Hours segment shows statistics for the re maining time period 6 00 PM to 7 00 AM This section ends with a grand total of busy port oc currences for e
68. the Miscellaneous command button is selected 12 39 MAXIMUM MAILBOX CAPACITY This is the amount of mailbox message storage available in minutes The default is 30 minutes The range is 1 120 minutes Enter the desired number in the text box If you enter an invalid number you will see a warning mes sage Select OK to continue 12 40 MAXIMUM NON SUBSCRIBER MES SAGE LENGTH This is the maximum length of time in minutes for non subscriber mailbox messages De fault is 5 minutes The range is 1 minute to the Maxi mum Mailbox Message Capacity value Enter the new value in the text box If you enter an invalid number you will see a warning message Select OK to continue 12 41 MAXIMUM OUTGOING MESSAGE LENGTH This is the maximum length for messages sent by the subscriber to another subscriber The default is 5 minutes The range is 1 120 minutes Enter the new value in the text box Jf you enter an invalid number you will see a warning message Select OK to continue 12 42 GREETING To determine the greeting callers will hear when they reach the mailbox select the Greet ing drop down list box and scroll the highlight bar to the desired selection Primary Alternate or System Greet ing NOTE Even if re programmed the system greet INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Cree Ee pi AS ERRATA RRA RA EDO ESE an 4 M i i i UMD j AS E E I cc eee es AI IA Z nes A He A E ROO La Play Recording Ins
69. the directory will be sorted by first name or last name select the drop down list box and scroll the highlight bar to the desired option 13 6 OK CANCEL When finished select the OK command button Or to exit without saving any changes select the Cancel command button Page 3 47 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 eres A ere SS ORY atadas PRA A DA aA ee RR ecg eg RSE RO 2 tify ee Dio Voice Mall Greeting 02 Auto Att Greeting 03 Recording 03 04 Recording 04 05 Recording 05 06 Recording 06 07 Recording 07 08 Recording 08 09 Recording 09 10 Recording 10 11 Recording B CUSTOM RECORDINGS 13 7 This window appears when Custom Recordings is highlighted and the Program command button is se lected as shown on page 3 46 13 8 RECORDINGS DESCRIPTION The list box shows the custom recordings 01 50 and their current descriptions and lengths To change the description of a recording highlight it in the list box and select the Pro AAA A ARNO 7 Seer ne RR ASS E se PERS Description oid 0000 SR eR O vate aona IRIS INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE reve o ACA CORRA AR AER REP RIS e Minos E ie BOISE RIEL ERA PRO ALL pt CA LAAT TA ale A IR sts SRO RO ROS RES OS A7 Y AA O minutes 2 seconds O minutes O seconds O minutes O seconds O minutes O seconds O minutes O seconds O minutes O seconds O minutes O seconds
70. their jumper straps set mail greetings or messages one or more of the VPCs in the proper positions Refer to step 5 on page and or unable to hear any 1 6 in SPECS INSTALL voice prompts Loose defective cabling be tween the IVX500 PC and the telephone system Check the cabling Tip and ring are reversed on Make sure the modular jack assemblies connected DC ringing VPCs to the IVX500 PC are wired correctly See Figure 1 1 on page 1 8 Defective VPC Replace the VPC SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION Voice processing applica The IVX500 PC s high For optimal performance the TVX500 PC is con tions are slow e g voice speed turbo processor figured with the high speed turbo mode always prompts are slow or are mode is turned off enabled Do not disable the turbo mode setting delayed in playing SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION Both internal and remote Message notification exten Each mailbox must have a station that will receive users have no message noti sion numbers have not been message notification whenever the mailbox re fication after receiving voice programmed ceives a message See PROGRAMMING page messages in their mailboxes 3 39 If the mailbox is associated with a station or hunt group it should be marked in the database as associated See PROGRAMMING page 3 39 Perform the programming procedures o
71. to recognize camp on tones when placing a call the Camp On timer must be ad justed Timer Values AB Change the Camp On timer to 10 seconds default is 3 seconds Page 4 26 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE APPLICATION amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 ee Eee NS F VALIDATED MAILBOX NUMBERS 7 13 This feature affects calls transferred to voice mail or placed through an automated attendant on the TVX500 If all mailbox numbers and extension IDs match extension numbers are associated the Vali date Voice Mailbox Numbers option should be enabled to allow the system to check that the number entered by the caller is valid If there are mailbox numbers that do not match an extension number non associated there is no need to validate and this option should be disabled 7 14 If the telephone system is programmed to validate voice mailbox numbers and the caller dials a number that does not have an associated mailbox on the TV X500 the number will be considered invalid even if a non associated mailbox with that number exists Miscellaneous System Data AF If all mail boxes and extension IDs on the IVX500 are marked as associated and match the extension numbers in the telephone system enable the Voice Mailbox Validation flag G CALL FORWARDING 7 15 Users can have calls sent to their voice mailboxes by using the call forwarding feature to send calls to the hunt
72. user to record a name for the automated attendant di rectory and establish a password Extension IDs can be created for stations hunt groups and applications A program planning sheet for this window appears in Fig ure 3 5 on page 3 70 10 2 EXTENSION IDS This list box shows the ex isting extension IDs When an ID is highlighted in this RAS AS EOS RRA ERAS OS ts eh ata Ne PELE ACECE LS LOOPS EEL aA ARA ARA EAE EER wate SLEEP PIPL RR 7 RS oe ER RA LIRA ty ER AA Oe Ay PA list box you can program directory information and a password for it 10 3 PROGRAM To program a password and the di rectory information for an extension ID select the Pro gram command button The window shown on the next page appears 10 4 CREATE EXTENSION IDS To add extension IDs select the Create Extension 1Ds command button A window appears as shown on page 3 29 10 5 DELETE EXTENSION IDS To delete exten sion IDs select the Delete Extension IDs command but ton A window appears as shown on page 3 30 Page 3 27 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 Directory Information Unlisted Number _ Private Extension A PROGRAMMING AN EXTENSION ID 10 6 The window shown above appears when you highlight an extension ID and select the Program com mand button shown on the preceding page Use the fol lowing procedures for programming the extension ID 10 7 DESCRIPTION If desired enter a name for the extension
73. validated voice mailbox numbers 4 24 with voice computer hunt groups 4 21 IMX 256 832 system See 256 832 Port systems Initializing mailboxes 2 11 3 39 Installation hard drive 1 19 motherboard setup 1 19 optional equipment 1 5 outline 1 2 PC 1 5 pre installation checklist 1 5 tools and supplies 1 5 Inter Tel logo window 3 14 Inter Tel telephone systems 1 2 4 3 L Lamp update delay timer 3 55 List box 3 3 Lock DTE baud rate 3 11 Loop current loss timer 3 55 Mailboxes 2 8 access 2 11 associated non associated 2 9 3 39 capacities 1 2 directory 2 14 2 20 3 39 3 44 names 2 11 2 20 envelope settings 2 14 3 39 3 44 greetings 3 39 3 44 group lists 2 8 3 31 initialization 2 11 3 39 message length 3 39 3 44 message notification station 2 9 3 39 3 41 passwords 2 8 2 14 3 39 3 41 personal greeting 2 14 personal options 2 14 programming 3 35 3 39 3 41 receive only 2 8 3 39 3 41 recording instructions 3 39 3 44 remote messaging 2 8 3 39 3 41 3 42 standard 2 8 3 39 3 41 subscriber access 2 11 subscriber statistics 3 40 3 45 system administrator 2 8 2 17 validated numbers 2 9 Material return authorization MRA ix 5 9 Maximum greeting length timer 3 55 Message center 256 832 port systems 4 15 AXXESS system 4 31 ESP system 4 19 GMX 152D system 4 26 GMX 48 system 4 23 IMX 1224 2460 system 4 19 IMX 2448 system 4 23 Messa
74. will play a custom recording and then hang up 3 3 Call routing announcements are recorded using the System Administrator s mailbox as described on page 2 18 Each announcement is assigned to use a custom greeting number in database programming Refer to page 3 48 in PROGRAMMING B DIGIT TRANSLATION 3 4 Digit translation allows callers to dial a single digit to access the directory subscriber voice mail or a designated extension number mailbox or hunt grop pilot number Up to 12 digit translation storage locations 0 9 and are available for each Call Routing An nouncement application refer to PROGRAMMING page 3 21 3 5 To use digit translation the Call Routing An nouncement application must have special program ming Digit translation is programmed by assigning spe cific Actions for each digit and determining what will happen if the caller does not enter a digit Timeout The length of time the application will wait for input from the caller 0 60 seconds is also programmable e The Actions that can be selected for digits and 0 9 and for Timeout are Transfer To Operator This action transfers the call to the Dial 0 Destination that is programmed in the System Maintenance window shown on page 3 63 Company Directory First Name This sends the caller to the directory prompt that asks the caller to enter the first name of the desired party Company Directory Last N
75. 0 A subscriber can access his or her mailbox by fol lowing these steps 1 Dial the Voice Mail application access number You hear the main menu 2 During or after the greeting press to identify yourself as a subscriber 3 Enter your mailbox number and personal pass word Initializing A Subscriber Mailbox Or Extension ID 4 31 The first time a subscriber uses Voice Mail he or she must customize the mailbox System prompts will instruct the subscriber to e Change the default password number same as the mailbox number to a personal password e Record a name to identify the mailbox owner in the company directory Directory names can be up to 1 minute in length o Listen to the Voice Mail application introduction You cannot skip this introduction If you exit with out listening to it the introduction will play again the next time you access your mailbox 4 32 TO INITIALIZE A MAILBOX OR EXTENSION ID 1 Dial the Voice Mail application access number You hear the main menu 2 Press to identify yourself as a subscriber 3 Enter your mailbox number and default pass word Your default password is your mailbox number 4 Choose and enter a new password using digits 0 9 up to 12 digits Then press Your pass word is played back If you do not want to use a password press 4 5 Press the key to accept the entry Or press 3 if you wish to re enter your password and go
76. 0 The IVX500 Non Subscriber Voice Mail ap plication can be programmed to act as the message cen ter for stations Then when an intercom caller calls a station that is busy or unavailable the caller can choose to leave a message at the user s message center the Non Subscriber Voice Mail application The IVXS00is automatically called The caller is connected directly to the user s assigned mailbox and hears the called sta tion s personal greeting 9 11 The message center designation also allows key set users to quickly and easily forward calls to their voice mailboxes To do this a keyset user presses the FWD key and then the MSG key Calls forwarded through the keyset are then sent to the keyset user s voice mailbox 9 12 To use these features perform the following da tabase programming Station Programming Individual Station In formation Miscellaneous Information win dow Program the desired stations to have the circuit connected to the Non Subscriber Voice Mail application as the message center and or voice mail extension E CAMP ON TONES 9 13 When callers dial the IVX500 and all ports are in use they can simply wait off hook camp on until one of the ports is available To prevent the camp on tones from being sent to the TVX500 perform the following database programming Station Programming Individual Station In formation Miscellaneous Flags window Pro gram all the IVX500 circuits to disallow camp
77. 1D in the Description text box The descrip tion can be up to 20 characters in length If the extension ID is associated with an application the application s description in shown in the text box and cannot be changed in this window the description can only be changed in Application programming as shown on the bottom of page 3 21 10 8 DIRECTORY INFORMATION Select the desired option to place a check mark in its associated check box Unlisted numbers are not included in the di rectory but can be dialed if the caller knows the exten sion number Private numbers can be dialed but only the name is played in the directory 10 9 PASSWORD To program a password for the Extension ID select this command button A window INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE oo yy oe LE Bs appears as shown below Enter a password up to 12 dig its using digits 0 9 The digits will not appear on the screen when typed they will appear as asterisks Then select the OK command button The window heading will change to Password Validation and you must retype the password exactly as before If the en tered passwords match you will return to the Password window if not you must re enter the new password and verify it again If you make a mistake while entering the password or wish to leave it unchanged select Cancel 10 10 OK CANCEL When finished programming the extension ID select OK Or to exit withou
78. 5 To delete one or more mailboxes select the De lete Mailboxes command button shown on page 3 35 A window appears as shown above To determine the mailboxes that will be deleted use the following proce dure e ADD ALL Use the Add command button to move the highlighted mailbox from the Pick List to the Mailboxes To Delete list or use the All command button to place all mailboxes in the list e REMOVE NONE To remove a mailbox from the Mailboxes To Delete list highlight it and select the ORAR 7 A os Re se E SA O AKA a ato Mal INIA II EIN EEE E EERE a ee O OOO NO AAAS AEn PAn LLAU AUDAR POSES CAAAA sf SA OLD PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 eze ox SOOO OR y eer Hie bi Remove command button Or to remove all mail boxes use the None command button e OK CANCEL When the Mailboxes to Delete list box appears as desired select the OK command but ton Or to exit without changing the lists select the Cancel command button NOTE When a large number of mailboxes have been deleted it will take several minutes for the system to up date the database and return to the Mailboxes program ming window after you select the OK command button Page 3 37 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 ate RA ca Ee E E Pick List ries ARSS es si i ee Sa Se ER 2 SPA AA ATTE oe ASI I Re Ne ORO I IRON Re CII Ey D CLEARING MAILBOX MESSAGES e 12 16 The window shown above appear
79. August 1994 a EE 0 9 256 832 Port systems 4 12 call forwarding 4 16 camp on tones 4 15 hunt groups 4 12 IDC board 4 12 message center 4 15 message waiting notification 4 15 outside calls 4 16 validated voice mailbox numbers 4 15 voice computer hunt groups 4 12 4 17 voice mail hunt groups 4 13 without voice mail hunt groups 4 14 A Application and port statistics report 3 58 3 61 Applications 2 2 capacities 1 2 greeting 3 17 3 21 programming 3 17 3 19 3 20 setup instructions 4 5 troubleshooting 5 4 5 6 Applications PC hard drive 1 19 installation 1 5 motherboard 1 19 specifications 1 3 troubleshooting 5 4 Applications software 1 3 installation 1 17 Audio Interface Card AIC 1 3 illustration 1 13 installation 1 6 Auto answer modem 3 10 Automated attendant 2 2 2 3 3 17 3 20 3 46 3 47 custom recordings 2 4 2 18 directory 2 3 extension IDs 3 27 recall destination 2 2 2 4 3 17 3 20 setup instructions 4 5 troubleshooting 5 5 Automated attendant recall destination setup instructions 4 6 AXXESS system 4 30 analog voice mail 4 30 call forwarding 4 32 camp on tones 4 31 message center 4 31 message waiting notification 4 31 premium features 4 30 SLA on DKSC circuit 4 30 validated voice mailbox numbers 4 31 B Baud rate 3 12 3 63 Broadcast messages 2 17 Busy tone cycle detect timer 3 54 C Call forwarding 256 832 port systems 4 16
80. BIOS and its defaults the screen should appear similar to the following sample Sample Auto Configuration Enabled DMA Address Data Hold Time 1 2 T AT BUS Clock Select CPUCLK 6 I O Recovery Time Delay 4 BCLK Cache Read Hit Burst 3 2 2 2 Cache Write Hit Wait State 2WS DRAM Page Mode Disabled DRAM Read Wait State 2WS DRAM Write Wait State 3WS Memory Remapping Enabled Memory above 16MB Cacheable No CSO9OO C3FFF 16K Cacheable No C4000 C7FFF 16K Cacheable No C8 CBFFF 16K Cacheable No CC CFFFF 16K Cacheable No D D3FFF 16K Cacheable No Cacheable Cacheable D4 D7FFF 16K D8 DBFFF 16K DCOSS DFFFF 16K Cacheable E0000 EFFFF 64K Cacheable F FFFFF 64K Cacheable Non Cacheable Block1 Enable Non Cacheable Block 1 Size 1 Non Cacheable Block 1 Base Non Cacheable Block2 Enable Non Cacheable Block 2 Size 1 Non Cacheable Block 2 Base Co processor Ready Delay Enabled RAS Time Out Disabled DMA CAS Timing Delay t Disabled DMA Clock Select 2 SCLK 2 NOTE Be sure to set the Memory Remapping field to Enabled Ensure that all of the fields are set similar to those shown in the sample above If not use the up or down arrow keys to highlight the desired field then use the PG UP or PG DN keys to change the setting Press the ESC key to exit The monitor again displays the main menu of options 18 19 20 Use the down arrow key to highlight the WRITE TO CMOS AND EXIT op
81. CES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FEATURES Issue 1 August 1994 3 CALL ROUTING ANNOUNCEMENT 3 1 The Call Routing Announcement application can be used as a playback device that plays a message and then hangs up to disconnect the call This is especially useful for programming hunt group announcement and overflow stations As an option the Call Routing An nouncement application can use digit translation which allows the caller to press a single digit for access to the directory subscriber voice mail a station a hunt group the operator extension or a mailbox CALL TO CALL ROUTING ANNOUNCEMENT WITHOUT DIGIT TRANSLATION Call Routing Announcement answers and plays a greeting followed by a menu of options Call Routing Announcement hangs up If this is an announce ment or overflow station the call returns to the hunt group CALL TO CALL ROUTING ANNOUNCEMENT WITH DIGIT TRANSLATION Call Routing Announcement answers and plays a greeting followed by a menu of options Caller selects option Call is sent to station hunt group voice mail operator destina tion or directory as determined by digit programming Caller does not select an option Timeout Call is sent to station hunt group voice mail operator destina tion or directory as determined by Timeout programming A CUSTOM RECORDINGS 3 2 When accessed the Call Routing Announcement application
82. ECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 FIGURE 1 2 BACK OF ASSEMBLED IVX500 PC SAMPLE 1 ON OFF POWER POWER CABLE SAMPLE CARD SLOT SWITCH CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT NOTE Depending on the model of PC being used the sample card slot arrangement and connector loca tions shown above could vary somewhat See Figure 1 3 on the next page for another sample Page 1 9 SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION INTER TEL PRACTICES Issue 1 August 1994 IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FIGURE 1 3 BACK OF ASSEMBLED IVX500 PC SAMPLE 2 POWER CABLE SAMPLE CARD SLOT CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT NOTE Depending on the model of PC being used the sample card slot arrangement and connector loca tions shown above could vary somewhat See Figure 1 2 on the previous page for another sample Page 1 10 o 2 Ae Issue 1 August 1994 SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE INTER TEL PRACTICES PC MOTHERBOARD CARD SLOT ARRANGEMENT SAMPLE 1 FIGURE 1 4 oc E O L zZ 2 O O 2 N TO RESET CONNECTOR ON AIC AUDIO INTERFACE AANA NA ANAYA MANUAL NAAA ANUN RANA NANA NA MA MAA ANUUANA NANA RANA AA A NAAA AAA VANA NA ANA MAAA N NANA NAVA NAUNNAS UNA AAA VANA MA MA VANA NA NU UA RANA UAG LAA AALS SANAS ASESELLADSSSEDL AMARA AMA AAA CARD AIC 4TH VPC 3RD VPC 2ND VPC AN A 4 AAL
83. ERS SRS SES OR SDSS OR RARE Sie AA i EE VA RAS ERRE RAR RE SARRAR AA RRE RAR RRA Be ye ETA oe v Pata Y gt SS GMB nee CO ds i ery PRIT ees Ry dd eee 9 9 CREATE APPLICATION To create a new ap plication select the Create Application command but ton A window appears as shown on page 3 20 This command button cannot be selected if 25 applications have already been programmed 9 10 DELETE APPLICATIONS To remove one or more applications from the Applications list box select the Delete Application command button A window ap pears as shown on page 3 24 9 11 PORT PROGRAMMING A window appears as shown on page 3 25 Page 3 19 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Extension Application Type Auto Attendant Auto Attendant Recall Q O Call Routing Announcement Q Quick Message Retrieval No n subscriber Voice Mail A CREATING APPLICATIONS 9 12 The window shown above appears when the Create Application command button is selected To create a new application follow these procedures 9 13 EXTENSION An available extension number is displayed in the Extension text box To change the ex tension number for the application type the desired ex tension in the text box The number can have up to 5 digits but cannot begin with 0 If you attempt to enter an invalid extension number or a number that is already assigned y
84. ES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 This section of the manual describes the trouble shooting procedures to follow in the event of a system malfunction System repair is limited to replacing the PC or its parts hard disk Voice Processing Cards VPCs cables etc 2 TROUBLESHOOTING CHECKLIST 2 1 To save time perform the troubleshooting proce dures in the following order 1 Check to see that the telephone system especial ly the single line card connected to the IVX500 System is operating properly 2 Check to see that the IVX500 PC is operational 3 Isolate the problem and refer to the appropriate troubleshooting chart see next section 4 If the problem continues to occur try rebooting the IVX500 PC If the problem persists contact Inter Tel Customer Support 3 TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS 3 1 The simplified troubleshooting charts located on the following pages list symptoms possible causes and corrective actions for problems Look up the problem in the appropriate chart and perform the corrective actions in the order given NOTE Throughout the troubleshooting section of the manual there are numerous references to replacing the defective part and returning it for repair However be fore returning any part proper troubleshooting proce dures should be used to verify that the part is actually defective For more information on returning defective equipment refer to page 5
85. Each hunt group should contain ports that are assigned to one type of application in the IVX500 data base For example a hunt group of Automated Atten dant ports a hunt group of Non Subscriber Voice Mail ports etc 1 Create a hunt group arrangement like the one de scribed in the programming example below In the example the station circuits for extension numbers 112 113 114 and 115 are connected to four ports of an IVX500 The hunt group ar rangement is programmed as follows a Station Data Specific Station Information DAA e Intercom number 112 Designate inter com number 113 as the secretarial inter cept e Intercom number 113 Designate inter com number 114 as the secretarial inter cept e Intercom number 114 Designate inter com number 115 as the secretarial inter cept e Intercom number 115 Do not desig nate a secretarial intercept e Designate the attendant as NONE for all IVX500 ports in the hunt group so that the cancel forward feature cannot be used 2 The following programming steps must also be completed on the telephone system a Station Data Specific Station Information DAA e When programming each single line cir cuit that will be attached to the IVX500 designate the circuit as a voice mail sta tion e Assign circuit connected to the Quick Message Retrieval application as the al ternate message source for all of the IVX500 ports in the hunt group
86. However the caller will be instructed that the selection is invalid and returned to the initial instructions 5 4 Recorded names are added to the directories dur ing mailbox or extension ID initialization If the mail box or ID is not initialized the directory will include only the mailbox number or extension ID number Group Lists are not included in either type of directory 5 5 The caller uses the keypad keys to enter the name The application then plays the closest matching directo ry name that corresponds to the digits entered by a caller Once the name has been played the system will return a menu of options including the following e Listening to the previous or next name in the direc tory e Listening to additional information This option is not available if the mailbox or extension ID number has been classified in the database as a Private number e Spelling a new name INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE e Changing from a last to first name search mode e Accepting the name A LOCATING A NAME Entering A Name 5 6 Callers use a method called Quick Spell To use Quick Spell callers press a single digit key on the tele phone dial pad for each letter or character entered For example keypad key 2 shows ABC key 3 shows DEF etc To enter JONES you would press s fe e 3 7 Some characters are not shown on the keys for Q press 7 for Z press 9 for punctua
87. INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Outside calls 256 832 port systems 4 16 ESP system 4 20 GMX 152D system 4 27 4 32 GMX 48 system 4 24 IMX 1224 2460 system 4 20 IMX 2448 system 4 24 remote message notification 2 10 p Pager notification 2 10 3 42 See also Remote message notification digit strings 3 46 programming 2 15 retry timer 3 56 Part numbers 6 1 Passwords 3 13 3 63 extension ID 2 4 mailbox 2 8 2 11 2 14 3 39 3 41 system 3 66 Pause during message 2 12 timer 3 56 Pause voice mail timer 3 56 PC installation 1 5 hard drive replacement 1 19 motherboard setup 1 19 PC motherboard 1 19 PC specifications applications PC 1 3 diagnostics terminal 1 3 modem 1 3 programming PC 1 4 Personal greeting 2 14 Personal number 2 10 3 42 no answer timer 3 56 programming 2 15 Personal options 2 14 Ports Capacities 1 2 for remote message notification 3 18 3 26 number of rings 3 18 3 26 operation 3 18 3 26 programming 3 18 3 25 3 26 Premier telephone systems 1 2 4 3 Printer 1 4 1 5 Private number extension ID 2 4 mailbox 2 21 Page I 4 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Programming abbreviated commands 3 16 check box 3 5 command button 3 4 computer specifications 1 4 drop down list box 3 4 exit screen 3 15 hourglass cursor 3 5 list box 3 3 menus 3 16 modem 3 11 on site 3 10 option button 3 5 outline 1 2 planning 3 2 programming m
88. IVX500 INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE APPLICATION amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 nn ANA NANA NN C MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION 9 7 Toensure that keyset users receive the proper LED and LCD message waiting indications when they re ceive new voice mail messages perform the following database programming Station Programming Individual Station In formation window Assign each of the circuits connected to the IVX500 a user name of V MAIL or some other similar identifying name 9 8 The following programming must be completed in the IVX500 database to allow the IVX500 to leave mes sage waiting notifications at the stations Station Programming Individual Station Pro gramming Miscellaneous Information win dow Assign the circuit connected to the Quick Message Retrieval extension number as the al ternate message source for each of the IVX500 ports in the hunt group 9 9 To ensure that the subscribers have easy access to their voice mail messages when responding to message waiting notifications program the following Applications Programming Port Programming Port Configuration window Enable Remote Messaging Lamp Notification Enable any or all of the TVX500 ports for Remote Messaging Lamp Notification This allows them to turn on the message waiting indications at stations in the telephone system and to place outgoing calls Refer to page 3 26 in PROGRAMMING D MESSAGE CENTER 9 1
89. Interface Card rd ai ss 1 3 D Voice Processing Cards ccccccccccccccccccccccccccsescceceens 1 3 E Message Storage Space cccccccccccccccccccccccceccccesecseces 1 3 Ee DIAGNOSES sisi oo bse oe oo at ie 1 3 G Optional Printer iia 1 4 H Optional Modem vecs ii i 1 4 Programing PC Specifications oooooooooooomororororsrrrroncsosss 1 4 PY A500 PC Installation si A de 1 5 A Pre Installation Checklist ccc cccccccccccccccccccececececs 1 5 B Hardware Installation cccccccccccccccccces ere errr 1 6 C Software Installation cccccccccccccccncacccccccccsecsccacece 1 17 7 IVX500 PC Hard Disk Drive Replacement ooooooooooomooooo o 1 19 A Replacing The Hard Disk Drive oooooooooooroooonmoroo 1 19 B Checking The PC Motherboard Setup ccccccccccccceccees 1 19 C Formatting The Hard Disk Drive And Installing MS DOS O atea eta 1 21 D Installing The Software ooooooooooo oo oo appa sneha oe be ees 1 22 Page 1 1 SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE a aan NANA NN 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 The Inter Tel IVX500 System is a specially equipped personal computer PC that can be connected to a wide variety of telephone systems to provide inte grated voice processing features such as voice mail automated attendant call routing announcement and directory services 1 2 The IVX500 Sy
90. LAR UA MANU A SAA ARALLRLESELBEBEABBEERLEREDADLADS 1ST VOICE PROCESS ING CARD VPC DISK CONTROLLER CARD SERIAL PARALLEL PORT COMBO CARD Page 1 11 the location of the reset connector shown above could vary somewhat See Figure 1 5 on the next page NOTE Depending on the model of PC Motherboard being used the sample card slot arrangement and for another sample INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION Issue 1 August 1994 PC MOTHERBOARD CARD SLOT ARRANGEMENT SAMPLE 2 FIGURE 1 5 2 PIN CONNECTOR TO RESET CONNECTOR ON AIC Ww Q DE gt wi 5 5 gt o9 QO 5 lt CARD AIC UUUUA NULA NANA RAMA A NAAA A AAA MANUNAAANUA NAVA NAAA NARA AAA 4TH VPC AN URBANA SANA NANA DARA ANA AMA ANVAMA MANN AAA NAAA AAA 3RD VPC 2ND VPC H MES O 6 Ce a O y lt Og 9 y gt gt YN q_ ax uu 32 O lt q co 20 QM Oz y O yn O O the sample card slot arrangement and NOTE Depending on the model of PC Motherboard being used bove could vary somewhat See Figure 1 4 on the previous the location of the reset connector shown a page for another sample Page 1 12 INTER TEL PRACTICES SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 e FIGURE 1 6 AUDIO INTERFACE CARD AIC O 0 E O O DO e 2 PIN CONNECTOR T
91. LLATION amp MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 FIGURE 3 6 GROUP LIST PROGRAMMING GROUP GRP OR GL R O yn PS _ 3 y g 3 8 AN 5 S 3 gt E My S S ah E gt g e S 8 Nur DESCRIPTION LIST NUMBER LIST MEMBERS Page 3 71 PROGRAMMING INTER TEL PRACTICES Issue 1 August 1994 IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FIGURE 3 7 MAILBOX PROGRAMMING MAIL OR MB TO USE Make sufficient copies of this page and fill in information for each mailbox FIELD INFORMATION Mailbox Number Mailbox is Associated Mailbox Type Standard or Receive Only Description Message Notification Station Enable Remote Messaging Yes or No Password Primary Message Notification Enabled Yes or No Notification Number Start Time Stop Time Notification Type Personal or Pager Notification Category Each New or Priority A S zZ Days of the Week Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Remote Notification Table Alternate Message Notification Yes or No Notification Number Start Time Stop Time Z on O X ja S F S G Personal or Pager Notification Category Each New or Priority Days of the Week Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Remote Notification Table Miscellaneous Maximum Mailbox Message Capacity 1 120 minutes Maximum Non Subscriber Message Length 1 min Max Capacity Maximum Outgoing Message Length 1 120 minutes Gre
92. M MAILBOX GROUP LIST MAINTENANCE 1 Dial the Voice Mail application access number You hear the main menu 2 During or after the greeting press to identify yourself as a subscriber 3 Enterthe System Administrator mailbox number and password 4 Press 9 to access the System Administrator s Menu 5 When you hear the System Administrator Menu list of options press 2 to access the Mailbox Group List Maintenance option 6 Dial the mailbox extension ID or group list number to be accessed If programming a mailbox or extension ID you hear the Personal Options menu Follow the instructions on page 2 14 to program the person al options name password message envelope or greeting for the selected mailbox If programming a group list the current name if any is played You are prompted to enter a name After the tone record the name for the selected list or ID When you are finished press Then press again to accept the name Or press G to replay the name you just recorded ji erase and re record it Page 2 17 FEATURES Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Custom Recordings 4 57 4 51 The System Administrator can create and select 1 up to 50 custom recordings voice mail company greetings auto attendant greetings call routing an nouncements and hunt group announcement overflow 2 recordings Each recording has an assigned
93. M PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION Unabie to access desired Programming error Make sure the appropriate number of ports are IVX500 application inter assigned to each IVX500 application See PRO com callers hear continuous GRAMMING page 3 25 Also make sure the ringing outside callers are telephone system s single line ports are pro rerouted to the primary at grammed properly See the APPLICATION amp tendant TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP section Check the cabling connecting the telephone sys tem to the PC Loss of connection between the telephone system and the IVX500 PC The IVX500 PC power switch is off or the PC is in operative Check to make sure the IVX500 PC power switch is on and check the cabling connecting the system to the PC Try again within five or ten minutes A database save or restore is in progress the PC is being reset or the PC is starting up for the first time SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION Unable to access desired All programmed ports are Make sure the appropriate number of ports are IVX500 application inter currently busy assigned to each IVX500 application See PRO com Callers hear busy tones GRAMMING page 3 25 Also make sure the and camp on until a port is telephone system s single line ports are pro available outside callers grammed properly See the APPLICATION amp hear ringing until a port is TELEPHONE SYSTEM
94. MF commands to the ports Assign the Quick Message Retrieval ap plication as the alternate message source for all of the IVX500 ports in the hunt group b Hunt Groups E e Program the circuits connected to the IVX500 ports as hunt group members e For the Non Subscriber Voice Mail and Quick Message Retrieval applica tions Answer Yes to the prompt that asks Is This A Voice Mail Voice Com puter Hunt Group For further informa N APPLICATIONS amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES 1VX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE tion refer to the telephone system manu al e For any other IVX500 application type Answer No to the prompt that asks Is This A Voice Mail Voice Com puter Hunt Group and then answer Yes to the prompt that asks Is This An Automated Attendant Voice Computer Group For further information refer to the telephone system manual e Program the dial rules and recall destina tion for the hunt group refer to specific applications setup instructions in this chapter for dial rules For complete de tails refer to the telephone system manu al Without Voice Computer Hunt Groups 6 5 In software packages without voice computer hunt groups the intercom numbers assigned to the IVX500 ports should be programmed into a hunt group type ar rangement as described below instead of being placed in a regular hunt group NOTE
95. N 4 CUSTOMER SUPPORT A TECHNICAL SUPPORT 4 1 If problems persist when installing or servicing In ter Tel equipment While on site and with the proper troubleshooting tools available certified technicians may contact Inter Tel s Customer Support Department for assistance They can be reached from 7 00A M to 5 00P M Mountain Standard Time at 602 961 9000 or 1 800 669 5858 B EMERGENCY ASSISTANCE 4 2 After office hours and on weekends call 602 961 0277 and leave your message with the voice mail service A Customer Support Product Specialist will return your call as soon as possible usually within an hour Please remember that this is an emergency number for critical system problems only Sales ques tions equipment orders etc can only be handled dur ing normal business hours 5 DEFECTIVE UNIT RETURN POLICY IMPORTANT For complete information on returning equipment refer to the current Inter Tel Material Return Policy document part number 835 1065 This document includes specific information on the following sub jects warranty procedures to follow when return ing equipment equipment damaged in shipment insurance repair policy and advance replacement policy 1 2 3 4 5 Page 5 9 5 1 TO RETURN A DEFECTIVE UNIT FOR REPAIR Obtain an MRA number from Inter Tel s Order Processing Department Write the MRA number and ATTN MRA on the outside of each carton being returned INTER
96. NG CARDS 4 6 There are four different models of Voice Proces sing Cards VPCs available 2 Port AC Ringing 2 Port DC Ringing 4 Port AC Ringing and 4 Port DC Ring ing 4 7 Each 2 Port VPC provides up to two audio inter face ports for communication between the telephone system and the IVX500 PC Each 4 Port VPC provides up to four audio interface ports As many as four VPCs can be installed in the IVX500 PC for a maximum ofsix teen ports 4 8 There is one RJ14 four wire modular jack on each 2 Port VPC and there are two RJ14 modular jacks on each 4 Port VPC Each jack supports two ports The two inside wires are connected to one dedicated single line circuit and the two outside wires are connected to a second dedicated single line circuit For details refer to the installation procedures beginning on page 1 5 On 4 Port VPCS the ports are assigned as follows 4 PORT VPC 1 4 PORT VPC 2 PORT PORT PORT PORT 1 3 5 7 2 OUTSIDE PORT PORT PORT PORT WIRES 2 4 6 3 E MESSAGE STORAGE SPACE 4 9 The amount of voice mail message storage space available depends on the size of the hard disk drive installed in the IVX500 PC Listed below are the disk drives currently available and their approximate mes Sage storage capacities 105MB 9 hours 200MB 18 hours eo 340MB 31 hours F DIAGNOSTICS 4 10 For advanced troubleshooting purposes the IVX500 applications software includes special diagnos tics If an IVX500 a
97. O RESET SWITCH e 2 PIN CONNECTOR TO RESET CONNECTOR ON MOTHERBOARD P oe _ JUMPER STRAP o 40 PIN CONNECTOR NOT USED e JUMPER STRAPS DIP SWITCHES DB15 PCM CONNECTOR NOT USED MIM DB15 PCM CONNECTOR NOT USED Page 1 13 SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION INTER TEL PRACTICES Issue 1 August 1994 IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FIGURE 1 7 FOUR PORT VOICE PROCESSING CARD VPC ADDRESS SELECTION JUMPER STRAPS ZA We Z Z Z ZH Z Z TA A Z Z Z Z DB15 CONNECTO ONNECTOR Z MODULAR JACKS Z Z FA g ots ae A Z PORTS 1 amp 2 ZF PORTS 3 amp 4 Page 1 14 INTER TEL PRACTICES SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 A NN EAN ENEE EE era FIGURE 1 8 TWO PORT VOICE PROCESSING CARD VPC ADDRESS SELECTION JUMPER STRAPS MODULAR JACK DB15 CONNECTOR Page 1 15 SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION INTER TEL PRACTICES Issue 1 August 1994 IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FIGURE 1 9 SERIAL PARALLEL PORT COMBINATION CARD SPC ee W i DB9 COM1 CONNECTOR Uy DB15 CONNECTOR TO DIAGNOSTICS TERMINAL NOT CURRENTLY USED DB25 COM2 CONNECTOR DB25 CONNECTOR TO PROGRAMMING PC TO PARALLEL PRINTER FOR APPLICATIONS REPORTS NOTE Depending on the model of SPC being used the location of the connectors and cables shown above could vary somewhat Also instead of a separ
98. ORWARDING 9 17 Users can have calls sent to their voice mailboxes by using the call forwarding feature to send calls to the hunt group pilot number The proper mailbox number is automatically dialed when the IVX500 answers the for warded call 9 18 When a call is forwarded to the hunt group it may have to try more than one port before reaching one that is available If the number of day night rings is changed to more than one ring in the IVX500 database the IVX500 will need enough time to search for an avail able port and allow the number of day night rings at the selected port before the Forward No Answer timer ex pires and the KSU retrieves that call Ensure that the fol lowing timer is set long enough to allow the VX500 time to answer the call System Wide Features Timers window En sure that the Forward No Answer timer is pro grammed to be longer than the time it takes the call to ring at multiple ports in the voice mail hunt group while searching for an available port H OUTSIDE CALLS 9 19 If the IVX500 is programmed to place outside calls and the telephone system the following program ming is required Station Programming Individual Station In formation Outgoing Access window Make sure the circuits connected to IVX500 ports that will be placing outgoing calls have outgoing ac cess for the appropriate trunk groups Station Programming Individual Station In formation Toll Restriction window M
99. PROGRAMMING 6 3 This section contains the procedures required for programming the single line circuits connected to IVX500 ports into hunt groups Depending on the soft ware version of your telephone system you will use one of the following programming methods o With Voice Computer Hunt Groups These hunt groups can utilize dial rules and or the Voice Talk DTMF feedback feature as described below See page 4 4 for more information on dial rules o Without Voice Computer Hunt Groups Older systems do not have voice mail or voice computer hunt groups but can be programmed to function like a hunt group with the IVXS00 See page 4 22 With Voice Computer Hunt Groups 6 4 In some GMX 48 software packages single line circuits used by the TVX500 can be programmed into a voice computer hunt group The group has a pilot num ber that is dialed to access the IVX500 ports With a voice computer interface the ports on the IVX500 do not have to be assigned to specific applications They are assigned as Voice Computer Hunt Group ports in the IVX500 database and the dial rule string sent by the telephone system determines the IVX500 application that will be used Therefore the telephone system can have several voice computer hunt groups that all contain the same IVX500 ports However each hunt group would have a different set of dial rules to send to the IVX500 1 To use the hunt groups the following program ming must be complet
100. Programming Individual Station Programming Miscellaneous Information window Assign the Quick Message Retriev al voice computer hunt group pilot number as the alternate message source for all of the IVX500 ports in the hunt group e Station Programming Individual Station Programming Miscellaneous Station Flags Programming window e On systems with the DTMF Feedback Tones flag enable the flag for each port so that the KSU can send Voice Talk DTMF commands to the ports e If desired enable the Automated Atten dant VM DISA Do Not Disturb Break through flag for each circuit connected to an IVX500 port to allow the IVX500 to ring through to stations that are in do not disturb mode e If required enable DC ringing for each circuit connected to an IVX500 port With Voice Mail Hunt Groups 4 6 In some systems a hunt group can be designated as a voice mail hunt group to enable the hunt group to contain the multiple ports of the IVX500 unit Each of the IVX500 ports is programmed in the distribution list like a regular hunt group station With this feature in coming calls to the IVX500 can be sent to a single exten sion number pilot number where they can be processed even if one port is busy or out of service 4 7 Each voice mail hunt group should contain one type of application for example an Automated Atten dant hunt group a Non Subscriber Voice Mail hunt group etc 4 8 Ifthe hunt group is a sy
101. R twice The monitor displays the Stan dard CMOS Setup screen a portion of which is shown below Date mn date year xx xx xx Time hour min sec xx3XxX3XxX Hard Disk C Type 1 xx Hard Disk D Type Not Installed Floppy Drive A 1 44MB 3 5 Not Installed Not Installed Primary Display Keyboard 3 z Floppy Drive B Not Installed t 1 Adaptor ROM Shadow CC 16K Disabled Adaptor ROM Shadow DM00 16K Disabled Adaptor ROM Shadow D4060 16K Disabled Adaptor ROM Shadow D800 16K Disabled Adaptor ROM Shadow DC 16K Disabled Adaptor ROM Shadow E 60 64K Disabled System ROM Shadow F000 64K Disabled NOTE Be sure to set the Above 1 MB Memory Test and Memory Parity Error Check fields to Enabled the System Boot Up Sequence field to A C and the Cache Memory field to Disabled If using this BIOS with a 486 motherboard set 9 After setting the correct date and time check to the Cache Memory field to Internal see that the Hard Disk C field is set to the proper s type for the new drive that was just installed Jf it ample 2 is not use the up or down arrow keys to highlight the Hard Disk C field then use the PG UP or PG ER 0 Ss amning 1 ais DN keys to change the setting to the proper type o E Ep rb dy 15 Finally enter the other hard drive data cylin Hard Disk Type 47 RAM Area 1 01309 ders heads etc as prompted System Boot Up Num Lock On Weitek Processor 2 Absent NOTE All Inter Tel hard disk dr
102. RS wen SAULT RANGE RENAE CC CI CC A E 0 EIN A ET CI CI ET CI CI CITO CIN COCO IN EEC E ECC pair ii CS CC Hookflash Duration 1 100 hundredths 10 1 30 seconds 100 1 1000 hundredths 1 15 minutes 1 100 tenths 1 100 tenths Minimum Time Between Incoming Calls 1 100 tenths Notification No Answer Detection 1 25 rings Number Called Busy 1 255 minutes Hook Delay 0 5 seconds Outgoing DTMF Digit Duration 3 250 milliseconds Pager Notification Retry 20 1 255 minutes 30 1 240 seconds 30 1 255 minutes O Replay Forward Rewind Increment 1 60 seconds Shortest Message Allowed 3 1 5 seconds Voice Computer Hunt Group Dial String 1 1 5 seconds Voice Talk Feedback e A O S lt Z D a e di S 3 5 Fp EE ES E at lt FEleELE Oj ac z e 313 3 31 17 A 5 3 Sei Oo ea amp lt im o 3 e PFO ee a U y Se e al amp O BS 38 lt gt SB EJT 010l 8 SIRIS S E 1 30 seconds Page 3 75 PROGRAMMING INTER TEL PRACTICES Issue 1 August 1994 IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FIGURE 3 9 REPORT PROGRAMMING REP FIELD INFORMATION CS me Manual Report Generation Application and Port Statistics Yes or No Directory Listing Reports Yes or No Group List Report Yes or No Enable Automatic Reports Clear Statistics After Reports Print Yes or No Application and Port Statistics Yes or No Yes or No Directory Listing Reports Yes or No
103. S amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE NN NN B WHAT DO THE DIAL RULES DO 2 4 Voice Computer Hunt Groups use special dial rules that tell the IVX500 which application to use Au tomated Attendant Recall Destination Call Routing Announcement Quick Message Retrieval or Non Sub scriber Voice Mail 2 5 The single line circuits connected to IVX500 ports can be assigned as members of several different Voice Computer Hunt Groups each with its own set of dial rules 2 6 When programmed the Voice Computer Hunt Group s dial rule string should contain up to three fields entered using this format lt IVX500 application number gt 4 H 1 AE A A y el FIELD 1 FIELD 2 FIELD 3 2 7 In some applications dial rule 4 is not needed or is substituted with dial rule 15 The three symbols in dicate the ends of the fields The dial rule fields are de fined as follows e Field 1 The IVX500 Application number The application s IVX500 number assigned in PRO GRAMMING page 3 20 is identified in the dial rule followed by a in quotation marks The ap plication number tells the IVX500 System which ap plication to use Automated Attendant Voice Mail Call Routing etc For example if the voice com puter hunt group was set up to access an Automated Attendant application with number 275 in the IVX500 database the
104. SETUP section available The number of call attempts If the problem persists it may be necessary to pur exceed the ports available chase and install additional VPCs through the VPCs SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION When power is turned on Diskette in floppy drive Ensure that the PC is not trying to boot off a dis the IVX500 PC does not kette in the floppy drive boot up properly The two pin AIC to reset switch cable is not con nected properly Be sure that pin 1 marked on each end of the cable matches pin 1 on the AIC and the PC Mother board If connected incorrectly the PC will be reset continuously The IVX500 PC boots up much faster in turbo mode Before shipping the PC is configured with the high speed turbo mode always enabled Do not disable the turbo mode setting The IVX500 PC s high speed turbo processor mode is turned off The keyboard option in the Before removing the keyboard from the PC al PC s CMOS set up routine is ways be sure to set the keyboard option to not set to installed installed in the Standard CMOS Setup program Page 5 4 INTER TEL PRACTICES TROUBLESHOOTING IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 FIGURE 5 1 TROUBLESHOOTING CHART CONT D SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION Automated attendant not re User error The caller must use a DTMF phone to enter digits
105. SWORD To program a password for the mailbox select this command button A window ap pears as shown below Enter a password up to 12 digits Asterisks appear in place of the digits as the password is typed Then select the OK command button The win dow heading will change to Password Validation and you must retype the password exactly as before If the entered passwords match you will return to the Mailbox window if not you must re enter the new password and verify it again If you make a mistake while entering the password or wish to leave it unchanged select the Can cel command button Page 3 41 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 ROR Rea a EC Ree oe A eS de A X e Ye Bd o aana ae 223 Gud i fou FEGE ion Ma Boao ee eI et OR E mary Alternate Messa PINALA EAA Ld el L445 setae Sear tara einer Enable Notification Notification Start Time 08 00am Notification Type Personal Number Remote Message Notification Programming 12 28 This window appears when the Primary Mes sage Notification or Alternate Message Notification command button is selected 12 29 ENABLE NOTIFICATION To enable re mote message notification select the Enable notifica tion check box to place a check mark in it To disable remote message notification select the check box again to remove the check mark 12 30 NOTIFICATION NUMBER In the Notifica tion Number text box enter the number outside number or extensi
106. TEL DOES NOT AC CEPT EQUIPMENT IF THE MRA NUMBER IS NOT ON THE CARTON On the repair tag identify the unit by the equip ment name part number and serial number Re pair tags are available from Inter Tel Describe the defect in detail and if applicable the circuit number related to the defect Include applicable alarm error messages if possible Document the estimated length of time the part had been in service prior to the failure ALL EQUIPMENT RETURNED FOR REPAIR MUST BE TAGGED WITH COMPLETE DE TAILED INFORMATION REGARDING THE DEFECT OR IDENTIFICATION OF THE PROBLEM Attach the repair tag to the defective equipment Retain a copy for your files Properly package the equipment for shipping i e return in original package or equivalent WARRANTY MAY BE VOIDED IF EQUIP MENT IS IMPROPERLY PACKAGED INTER TEL PRACTICES REPLACEMENT PARTS IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 REPLACEMENT PARTS CONTENTS PAGE E Tntroductioi lt a 6 1 2 Ordering Procedure ansias 61 3 Replacement Parts List ON 6 1 4 Recommended Spare Parts cccccsccccccccvccccccvccccces eee wean 6 1 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 This section provides the information necessary to order and stock replacement parts for the Inter Tel IVX500 System 2 ORDERING PROCEDURE 2 1 When ordering equipment for the TVX500 Sys tem provide the following information to the order processing clerk e Company name e Purchase order num
107. TION MAINTENANCE FEATURES Issue 1 August 1994 G SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR FEATURES 4 44 The voice mail System Administrator can use special features that are not provided to Subscribers The System Administrator mailbox has all standard sub scriber features plus the ability to do the following e Record a Broadcast Message e Perform Mailbox and Group List Maintenance Create and select custom recordings voice mail company greetings auto attendant recordings call routing announcements and hunt group overflow and announcement station recordings 4 45 To enter the System Administrator s mailbox the System Administrator dials the Voice Mail access number presses to access the main menu enters the a stem Administrator s mailbox number then presses 9 to reach the System Administrator Menu There is not a prompt for entering the 9 Broadcast Messages 4 46 The System Administrator has the ability to make a single recorded message and send it to all Stan dard and Receive Only s subscriber mailboxes Exten SIV IUE SESSA SA YA SMUDAL sion IDs do not receive Broadcast Messages 4 47 TO RECORD A BROADCAST MESSAGE 1 Dial the Voice Mail application access number You hear the main menu 2 During or after the greeting press to identify yourself as a subscriber 3 Enterthe System Administrator mailbox number and password 4 Press 9 to access the eds Administrator s Menu S Wh
108. TUP page 4 5 If using Voice Computer Hunt Groups the pro grammed dial string may be incorrect See PRO GRAMMING page 3 56 Check the cabling connecting the telephone sys tem to the PC Programming error Programming error Loose defective cabling be tween the telephone system and the IVX500 PC Defective single line card or Replace the defective card VPC SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION Automated attendant indi The extension does not have Extension ID numbers provide the automated at cates an extension number is an associated mailbox or ex tendant application a means for transferring calls invalid even though it exists tension ID number assigned to extensions which do not have mailboxes See on the telephone system PROGRAMMING page 3 27 SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION Automated attendant trans Programming error Make sure the mailbox is associated with a corre fers calls directly to voice sponding extensions number See PROGRAM mail without trying the ex MING page 3 41 tension number first Da Z TROUBLESHOOTING INTER TEL PRACTICES Issue 1 August 1994 1VX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FIGURE 5 1 TROUBLESHOOTING CHART CONT D SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION Unable to record any voice Incorrect strap settings on Ensure that all VPCs have
109. TVX500 to answer the call System Wide Features Timers window En sure that the Forward No Answer timer is pro grammed to be longer than the time it takes the call to ring at multiple ports in the Non Subscrib er Voice Mail hunt group while searching for an available port 4 21 Insome telephone system software packages us ers cannot forward calls to a hunt group except using system forwarding paths However calls can be for warded to the individual IVX500 ports which are pro grammed to circulate calls through the other ports in the hunt group when called To do this e Program the appropriate IVX500 ports as hunt group members and designate the hunt group as a voice mail hunt group as described on page 4 12 eo Create a system forwarding path that contains only that hunt group e For each port enable system forwarding when the port is busy or does not answer to the forwarding path that contains this hunt group 4 22 Users can then forward or transfer calls to one of the individual TVX500 ports and if the port is unavail able calls will circulate through the hunt group H OUTSIDE CALLS 4 23 If the IVX500 is programmed to place outside calls and the telephone system is programmed to use LCR the Transparent LCR feature must be enabled for the circuits connected to the IVX500 This allows the TVX500 to recognize the outside dial tone necessary for placing a call Station Programming Individual Station In f
110. X 152ZD System 06606255 ess cbew wees ooo sew ahs SEs hee ee es Inter Tel GLX PIUS System aia ARAS RA lt inter le AXXESS System aussi Ea CONAN ON ah YY hn a TROUBLESHOOTING susi idear ai eae NH Aa U Nbe s o A aon bia wheat a Rea ie ae be N Troubleshooting Checklist siria dad oa paw Heese ees gt Troubleshooting Charts aida a Baie hated aan detox sCUSIOMEE Suppi 600545 str aia eawes y Detective Unit Return Policy cacas ri aed REPLACEMENT PARTS ARNES a l ABEOQUCHION a ii TE ii alice 2 MOPGCHING Procedure poca pi 3 Replacement Parts DiStoarcateja sii da 4 Recommended Spare Pants ii a Page vi PAGE 4 1 4 3 4 5 4 12 4 17 4 21 4 25 4 29 4 30 5 1 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 9 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 I 1 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE LIST OF FIGURES Issue 1 August 1994 NUMBER LIST OF FIGURES TITLE SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTALLATION Figure 1 1 IVX500 PC And Telephone System Interface Figure 1 2 Back Of Assembled IvX500 PC Sample 1 o Figure 1 3 Back Of Assembled IVX500 PC Sample 2 o ooooo oo Figure 1 4 PC Motherboard Card Slot Arrangement Sample 41 Figure 1 5 PC Motherboard Card Slot Arrangement Sample 2 Figure 1 6 Audio Interface Card AIC o oooooooomcomormmm o Figure 1 7 Four Port Voice Processing Card VPC ooooooooomoooo o Figure
111. YSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 7 INTER TEL GMX 152D SYSTEM 7 1 In order for the IVX500 to work properly with the Inter Tel GMX 152D System the following installation and programming procedures must be performed A HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS 7 2 When connecting the IVX500 to the GMX 152D single line circuits a Station B2 board must be used This allows the 1VX500 to be directly connected to the single line ports without using COU circuits giving keyset users the capability of DTMF dialing on an inter com path to the single line ports The IVX500 supports DC ringing Therefore no additional equipment is needed for the interface 7 3 The IVX500 can be used with the special OPX software package B HUNT GROUP PROGRAMMING 7 4 The intercom numbers assigned to the IVX500 ports should be programmed into a hunt group type ar rangement as described below instead of being placed in a regular hunt group This allows the TVX500 to be accessed by dialing the first intercom number in the ar rangement as if it were a pilot number NOTE Each hunt group should contain ports that are assigned to one type of application in the IVX500 data base For example a hunt group of Automated Atten dant ports a hunt group of Non Subscriber Voice Mail ports etc 1 Create a bunt group arrangement like the one de scribed in the programming example below In the example the station circuits for extension numbers 112 113 114 and 115
112. a pager dial string LCD number and termination code will be sent 4 24 Ifthe number called is busy or does not answer the voice mail system will again verify the time of day and day of week parameters If the Primary Number was just called the voice mail system will call the sub scriber s Alternate number if it is enabled for the current time and day If neither station can be reached the sys tem will stop attempting the notification until the Num ber Called Busy timer expires and notification is at tempted again starting with the Primary Number 4 25 Notification calls to outside telephone numbers can be sent to a pager or to a number where a person will answer personal number e Ifthe call has gone to a pager the voice mail system will dial the programmed Pager Answer dial string the Pager LCD Number Display number and the Pager Termination dial string Then voice mail sys tem will disconnect the call e If the call has gone to a personal number the voice mail system will play a prompt which announces that the call is from voice mail play the directory name or mailbox number which originated the call and user instructions The listener can then enter the mailbox number s password to gain access to the mailbox and hear the message They have three chances to enter a correct password If the system re ceives an incorrect password three times the voice mail system will disconnect the call immediately and the attempt
113. ach of the days being reported Directory Listing Reports Directory Listings can be sorted by first name last name or extension mailbox number The listings show the description for the mailbox or extension ID the mailbox exten sion number the message notification station for mailboxes and mailbox information The mailbox information tells whether the mailbox is marked Pri vate and or Unlisted An X appears in the Mailbox field to indicate a mailbox that is neither Private nor Unlisted and a blank indicates that it is an extension ID Group List Report The purpose of the Group List report is to provide the System Administrator with a printed copy of the system s group lists The report identifies the group list number the description for the list and the mailboxes included in the group list INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE a PRS oe oo pets ARI an a a File s od Manual Report Generation Manual Report Selection Application and Port Statistics Directory Listing Reports C Group List Report Directory Sort Order 14 2 The programmer may establish automatic week ly reports that are sent to a printer on a selected day at a specified time If desired the programmer can also clear the system s statistics If desired manual reports may also be generated at any time without altering the week ly setup e The Manual Report Generation section of this win dow contains contr
114. advance to the list of options Then use the up or down arrow key to move the dot to the desired button e ALT key Press the ALT key plus the underlined character to move the dot to the desired option In the sample above you would use ALT D or ALT P F CHECK BOX EXAMPLE Pz Unlisted Number 4 18 Check boxes are used when an option is available that has only two states on off enabled disabled or yes no When the box is selected a check mark is placed inside it to indicate an affirmative state on en abled or yes Selecting a box that already contains a check mark removes the check mark off disabled or no 4 19 Check boxes can be selected using one of the fol lowing methods Mouse Place the mouse cursor on the desired check box and click the left button e TAB key Use the TAB key to advance to the check box to highlight it Then press the SPACE BAR to select it e ALT key Press the ALT key plus the underlined character to place the check mark in the box or re move it In the sample above you would use ALT D G ITEMS THAT CANNOT BE SELECTED DIMMED ITEMS 4 20 Ifanitem in a window appears in a dimmed color it cannot be selected unless an associated item is se lected For example in the Create Applications pro gramming window shown on page 3 20 the Quick Message Retrieval option is dimmed and cannot be se lected if a Quick Message Retrieval application already exists there can be only on
115. ake sure the circuits connected to IVX500 ports that will be placing outgoing calls have the proper toll re strictions 9 20 If the customer wants calls to ring in directly to an application program the appropriate telephone sys tem trunks to ring in to the single line circuit extension number s or hunt group pilot number associated with the application Trunk Group Programming window Stations with Ring In Make sure the circuits connected to IVX500 ports that will be receiving outside calls are programmed for ring in assignment for the appropriate trunk groups I SETTING THE DATE AND TIME 9 21 To ensure that the correct time is used by the IVX500 the following information is programmed in the IVX500 database System Maintenance window shown on page 3 63 in PROGRAMMING System Maintenance Enter current date and time or set it to match the programming PC Page 4 32 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING Issue 1 August 1994 TROUBLESHOOTING CONTENTS PAGE l INTLOOU COM ia AA 5 2 2 Troubleshooting Checklist o ooooooooooomoooomorororor2r rr ross 5 2 3 Troubleshooting Charts ooooooomorcororrcorrssrrorosssrrooso 5 2 4 Customer Support dor ds 5 9 A gt Technical Support iii 5S iowa ech A ea 5 9 B Emergency Assistance iii A AAA 5 9 5 Defective Unit Return Policy ERE eee ee ee ee ee 5 9 TROUBLESHOOTING Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTIC
116. al rule 4 is for entry through direct dialing NOTE If this field is not used you can enter only for Field 2 Or you can enter an extra after the application number in Field 1 XXX e Field 3 The dial rule that identifies the origi nating extension This dial rule indicates the exten sion number where the call originated For example if extension 200 called the voice computer hunt group the dial rule would identify the call as origi nating at 200 This is dial rule 1 in Inter Tel and Pre mier systems Follow this dial rule with a pound sign in quotation marks to mark the end of the dial rule field If the telephone system sends 1 5 digits in this field the IVX500 System will know the call is c ming from an extension and will not play the com pany greeting If it contains O or more than six digits an unknown or outside source is assumed and the company greeting will play 2 8 Do not include an asterisk in a dial rule string The asterisk is interpreted by the IVX500 System as a disconnect signal C WHAT IS VOICE TALK 2 9 On some systems the progress tones that are nor mally sent to the voice mail application can be replaced with Voice Talk DTMF feedback tones These tones can be utilized by the voice computer to determine call status such as whether the call is ringing has been an swered has been disconnected or if the called station is in do not disturb busy or forwarded to
117. alled station s message center the Non Subscriber Voice Mail application The IVX500 is automatically called and the caller is connected directly to the station user s assigned mailbox The caller hears the station user s personal greeting 7 9 The message center designation also allows key set users to quickly and easily forward calls to their voice mailboxes To do this a station user presses the FWD key and then the MSG key Calls forwarded through the keyset are then sent to the station user s voice mailbox All station users can forward calls di rectly to the voice mail pilot number using one of the call forwarding feature codes However single line sets do not have MSG keys that can be used for forwarding to the message center 7 10 To use the message center features perform the following GMX 152D database programming Station Data Specific Station Information DAA Program the desired stations to have the circuit connected to the Non Subscriber Voice Mail application as the message center E CAMP ON TONES 7 11 When callers hear busy signals when calling the IVX500 they can simply wait off hook camp on until the called port is available To prevent the camp on tones from being sent to the IVX500 perform the fol lowing database programming in the telephone system Station Data Specific Station Information DAA Program all the IVX500 circuits to disal low camp on tones 7 12 To allow the IVX500
118. ame This sends the caller to the directory prompt that asks the caller to enter the last name of the desired party Subscriber Access This sends the caller to the mailbox prompt that requests a mailbox number Invalid The digit will not be used Callers who press this digit hear a recording that tells them that it is invalid Transfer To Extension This action sends the call to a designated extension station hunt group or application Transfer To Mailbox This sends the call to a des ignated mailbox Transfer To Collected Extension To allow callers to dial extension numbers of stations and hunt groups that have a mailbox or extension ID use this Action for digits that correspond to the first digits of extension numbers For example if digit 1 is Transfer To Collected Extension cal lers can dial extension numbers that begin with 1 However if digit 1 is Transfer to extension 200 a caller attempting to dial a station exten sion number that begins with 1 will instead be transferred to 200 Hang Up This action disconnects from the call if the user does not enter a digit Page 2 5 FEATURES Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE IA A A ES E TT I I E 3 6 After the application is created and programmed the System Administrator s mailbox is used to make a custom recording that explains the options to callers as described on page 2 18
119. ar to the desired day 14 9 PRINT TIME To select the time of day for printing automatic reports select the Print Time drop down list box and scroll the highlight bar to the desired time 14 10 ENABLE AUTOMATIC REPORTS To en able the automatic report option select the check box to INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE place a check mark in it To disable automatic reports select the check box again to remove the check mark 14 11 CLEAR STATISTICS AFTER REPORTS PRINT This box is dimmed unless automatic reports are enabled If you want the statistics to be cleared every time an automatic report is printed select this check box to place a check mark in it To retain the statistics re move the check mark by selecting the check box again 14 12 MANUAL REPORT SELECTION AUTO MATIC REPORT SELECTION The Manual Report Selection and Automatic Report Selection portions of the window contain check boxes that allow you to select what reports to print manually or automatically To en able a report select the check box to place a check mark in it To disable the report select it again to remove the check mark 14 13 DIRECTORY SORT ORDER Available only if Directory Listing Reports are selected The Directory Sort Order drop down list boxes allow you to select First Name Last Name or Directory Number sorting order Select the appropriate drop down list box and scroll the highlight bar to the desired option
120. as shown above Ex tension numbers can have 1 5 digits but cannot begin with 0 12 13 OK When you have entered the desired range select the OK command button to return to the Exten sion ID Programming window If the selected range is invalid or conflicts with other extensions you will see one of the following messages e If you enter an invalid extension number you will see a warning message explaining the conflict Se lect the OK command button in the warning window to continue o Ifthe range you entered includes numbers that were previously assigned to extension IDs mailboxes or group lists the conflicts are displayed You can choose to abort the process and return to the Enter Range text box by selecting the Abort Batch Create command button in the warning window Or you can choose to override the conflicts and change the existing numbers into new mailboxes by selecting the Ignore Conflicts command button 12 14 CANCEL To exit from this window without creating any new mailboxes select the Cancel com mand button NOTE When a large number of mailboxes have been created it will take several minutes for the system to up date the database and return to the Mailboxes program ming window after you select the OK command button Page 3 36 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE ora A it Sae oa SERA EL RR EA Le ee JE SALE aaa RIOR NOOO OO OOOO SACADOS oe Se C DELETING MAILBOXES 12 1
121. ase programming cable kit to the DB9 COM1 serial port connector on the customer provided programming PC NOTE To use COM2 on the programming PC instead attach a straight through DB9 to DB25 converter to the DB9 modular adapter or attach a customer provided DB25 modular adapter 3 Plug one end of the reversing mod to mod line cord supplied with the database programming cable kit into the DB25 modular adapter installed in step 1 Plug the other end of the line cord into the DB9 modular adapter installed in step 2 DB25 ADAPTER IVX500 PC LINE CORD at a O DB9 ADAPTER PROGRAMMING PC 6 7 To begin a direct connection programming ses sion press FS or press ALT S and then select Connect to Remote System from the pull down menu while the Inter Tel logo is displayed The window shown on the page 3 12 appears You can then set the correct session information INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE C STAND ALONE PROGRAMMING 6 8 Touse a PC for stand alone programming the sys tem software must be loaded on the hard drive NOTE Stand alone programming should be used for training and demonstration purposes only Data programmed during a stand alone session cannot be transferred to the TVX500 PC using Database Save Restore 6 9 When the Inter Tel logo screen is displayed press the F3 key Or press ALT P to view the System Pro gramming pull down menu and then select Database Programmi
122. ate SPC as shown above some PCs may have a Disk Controller Combination Card that is equipped with serial and parallel ports see Figure 1 3 on page 1 10 Page 1 16 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION Issue 1 August 1994 C SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 6 8 The IVX500 PC is shipped with the applications software already installed on the hard disk drive As a back up 34 inch floppy disks containing the software are also included If the software is upgraded at a later time a new set of software disks will be provided NOTE To install the database programming software on the customer provided programming PC refer to page 3 9 in PROGRAMMING IVX500 Applications Software 6 9 Ifnecessary use the following procedure to install the applications software on the IVX500 PC s hard disk drive There is no need for a keyboard and monitor or a programming terminal NOTE To install the IVX500 applications software the hard disk drive must be properly formatted and must have MS DOS 6 2 installed If using a PC with equip ment other than that specifically recommended the sys tem will not operate properly 1 Insert Applications Software Disk 1 of 4 in the IVX500 PC floppy disk drive 2 Reboot the PC and wait for the files on the soft ware disk to be copied onto the PC s hard disk When finished the PC beeps twice every seven seconds to indicate it is ready for the
123. atic Route Selection ARS The IVX500 must be able to recognize outside dial tone when placing a call Station Data Specific Station Information DAA Ensure that the IVX500 circuits have the proper outgoing access and toll restrictions for placing calls Do not enable ARS Only toll re striction for the ports that will be used by the IVX500 for placing outside calls 6 19 Program the following in the IVX500 database Miscellaneous Information Remote Notifica tion Tables When programming the Remote No tification Tables use a trunk access code other than the ARS feature code 6 20 If the customer wants calls to ring in directly to an application program the appropriate telephone sys tem trunks to ring in to the single line circuit extension number s or hunt group pilot number associated with the application Station Data Specific Station Information DAA Make sure the circuits connected to IVX500 ports that will be receiving outside calls are programmed for ring in assignment for the appropriate trunk groups I SETTING THE DATE AND TIME 6 21 To ensure that the correct time is used by the IVX500 the following information is programmed in the IVX500 database System Maintenance window shown on page 3 63 in PROGRAMMING System Maintenance Enter current date and time or set it to match the programming PC Page 4 24 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE APPLICATION amp TELEPHONE S
124. ation station non associated mailbox By default the Message Notification Station number is the same as the mailbox number even if a cor responding extension number does not exist e Associated When the extension number message notification number and mailbox number for a sta tion are all programmed to match and the mailbox is marked in the database as associated the associated station user can forward calls to voice mail and have the call go directly to that mailbox s personal greeting Even if other mailboxes use that extension number as their message notification ex tension e Non Associated Non associated mailboxes have a message notification station assignment that is an extension number that does not match the mailbox number For example a hunt group pilot number can have a mailbox but the message notification must be sent to a specific station so that a message lamp can be lit or message notification signal can be sent If a station user s extension number does not match a mailbox number and the station user for wards calls to voice mail the caller will hear the main voice mail greeting and must enter a mailbox number NOTE If there are non associated mailboxes in the IVX500 System the telephone system must have the Validate Voice Mailbox feature disabled When enabled this feature prevents users from dialing mailbox numbers that do not match valid extension numbers 4 14 When a mailbox receives a
125. ation to ensure that it is work ing properly If necessary refer to the TROU BLESHOOTING section for additional help 3 SYSTEM CAPACITIES 3 1 Some of the IVX500 System features have maxi mum capacities that are dependent on system resources The features with such capacities are listed in the fol lowing table Applications per System Mailboxes and or Extension IDs per Sys i tem 16 25 500 Voice Mail Group Lists per System 100 100 2 10 50 1 Remote Message Notification Numbers per mailbox Tables per system for pager notification and outgoing access Members per group list Custom Recordings per System Quick Message Retrieval Applications per System System Passwords a Page 1 2 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION Issue 1 August 1994 a NN NN 4 IVX500 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS A PC REQUIREMENTS 4 1 The IVX500 PC is equipped with special voice processing circuit cards and applications software For complete installation instructions refer to page 1 5 4 2 The IVX500 PC requirements are e IBM compatible e 80386 33MHz or higher microprocessor with tur bo mode always enabled e MS DOS version 6 2 do not use the DoubleSpace or MemMaker utilities e Minimum 4MB RAM e Minimum 105MB hard disk drive e 3 inch 1 44MB double sided high density flop py disk drive e Disk Controller Card e Two COM ports RS 232 C ser
126. ay display page 3 12 A change in the baud rate will not a message about being un take effect until the next database programming able to communicate or los connection The current programming session is ing its connection unaffected Incorrect or loose defective Check the cabling between the two PCs See PRO cabling between the PCs GRAMMING page 3 10 for connection details Defective serial port card in Replace the defective card one of the PCs SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION ASCII type programming The programming terminal Ensure that the programming terminal is config terminal for diagnostics or is not configured correctly ured with the parameters listed on page 1 17 in loading voice prompts un or defective SPECS INSTALL Replace the terminal if defec able to communicate with tive TVX500 PC Incorrect or loose defective cabling between the pro gramming terminal and the IVX500 PC During boot up with applica tions software disk inserted the IVX500 PC may send out characters e g X OFF that disable the terminal Defective serial port card Replace the defective card Page 5 3 Check the cabling connecting the programming terminal to the PC Reset the terminal TROUBLESHOOTING INTER TEL PRACTICES Issue 1 August 1994 IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FIGURE 5 1 TROUBLESHOOTING CHART CONT D SYMPTO
127. ber Required date of shipment Part number s of equipment ordered Quantity required 3 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST 3 1 Figure 6 1 lists authorized parts available for re placement on the IVX500 System 4 RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS 4 1 Inter Tel recommends keeping several spare PCs on hand to ensure the best possible customer service FIGURE 6 1 REPLACEMENT PARTS DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER IVX500 PC IBM 386 or compatible Personal Computer PC Assembly 550 6000 PC Chassis with Power Supply ooooooooooom o o 440 6002 POWER SUPDIY ies 691 0100 PC Motherboard 80386 33MHz without RAM 440 6005 1MB SIMM four are needed ooooooooooomommoooooo 821 1035 Floppy Disk Drive 34 inch double sided high density 550 5111 Hard Disk Drive 200 MB ccc cece cece eee c ences 691 3010 Hard Disk Drive 340 MB c cee cccececenacees 691 3024 Disk Controller Card iia 691 3005 Floppy Disk To Controller Interface Cable 813 1105 Hard Disk To Controller Interface Cable 813 1557 Serial Parallel Combination Card SPC o o oooo o 550 5110 Audio Interface Card AIC ccc cece cece eee ees 550 2800 4 Port Voice Processing Card VPC AC ooommoooo 693 2000 4 Port Voice Processing Card VPC DC 4 693 2001 2 Port Voice Processing Card VPC AC 0000s 693 2003 2 Port Voice Processing Card VPC DC
128. ccess code other than the LCR feature code 7 21 If the customer wants calls to ring in directly to an application program the appropriate telephone sys tem trunks to ring in to the single line circuit extension number s or hunt group pilot number associated with the application Station Data Specific Station Information DAA Make sure the circuits connected to IVX500 ports that will be receiving outside calls are programmed for ring in assignment for the appropriate trunk groups Page 4 27 APPLICATIONS amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP INTER TEL PRACTICES Issue 1 August 1994 IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE I SETTING THE DATE AND TIME the IVX500 database System Maintenance window shown on page 3 63 in PROGRAMMING 7 22 To ensure that the correct time is used by the System Maintenance Enter current date and IVX500 the following information is programmed in time or set it to match the programming PC Page 4 28 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE APPLICATION amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 8 INTER TEL GLX PLUS SYSTEM 8 1 In order for the IVX500 to work properly with the Inter Tel GLX Plus System the following installation and programming procedures must be performed A HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS 8 2 The IVX500 is connected to circuits on the Acces sory Port Module APM B CAMP ON TONES 8 3 When callers dial the TVX500 and the called port is in use
129. code 01 After you hear the confirmation tone hang up e Remove the phone and reconnect the IVX500 to the station circuit 8 6 When a call is forwarded to the hunt group type arrangement described above it may have to try more than one port before reaching one that is available If the number of day night rings is changed to more than one ring in the IVXS500 database the IVX500 will need enough time to search for an available port and allow the number of day night rings at the selected port before the Forward No Answer timer expires and the KSU re trieves that call Ensure that the following GLX Plus timer is set long enough to allow the IVX500 time to an swer the call e Ensure that the Forward No Answer timer is pro grammed to be longer than the time it takes the call to ring at multiple ports in the Non Subscriber Voice Mail hunt group while searching for an available port E IVX500 PROGRAMMING 8 7 The following IVX500 programming steps must be performed in order for the IVX500 to work properly on the GLX Plus System This is just a brief program ming checklist other options may apply to individual installations Applications Programming e Applications Programming Create the nec essary IVX500 applications using the ap plication setup instructions in this chapter e Port Programming Port Configuration Select the appropriate application for each IVX500 port Miscellaneous Information Telephone
130. ct the check box again 15 17 START STOP TIME To determine the time period during which day mode will be in effect on the again 15 18 OK CANCEL When day mode programming is complete select the OK command button Or to exit Page 3 65 without changing any information select the Cancel command button PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 Windows Preferences Exit INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Monitor Restricted Pond Database Unrestricted Password Database Restricted Password C PASSWORDS 15 19 To set passwords select Passwords from the menu The system database can have two passwords Restricted and Unrestricted The Monitor Restricted and Monitor Unrestricted passwords are reserved for fu ture use e Database Restricted When the Database Program ming Restricted password is entered the user cannot make changes in the database However the user can execute Report Programming e Database Unrestricted A user who enters the Da tabase Programming Unrestricted password can make programming changes in any area 15 20 Ifthe restricted password is enabled but the un restricted password is not a warning appears because that situation would allow unrestricted access to the da tabase The programmer must determine whether to leave the passwords programmed as they are select OK or go back and program the missing password se lect Cancel 15 21 A program planning sheet is loca
131. d When you hear the Subscriber Menu prompt press 2 to send a message Dial the desired mailbox number or group list number If you do not know the mailbox number you can press pound to access the company directory to locate and select the mailbox See page 2 20 for directory instructions Group lists are not included in the directory If the mailbox is full a prompt will notify you that the mailbox cannot receive messages How ever it will allow you to leave a message at another mailbox Leave your message with another subscriber or try again later After hearing the subscriber s name press to accept it When you hear the tone record your message NOTE If the system detects silence for longer than 5 seconds it will prompt you to speak up The recording if any will remain unchanged To pause while recording press 2 To continue press any key The pause length is determined by the Pause Voice Mail timer 8 9 Page 2 13 FEATURES Issue 1 August 1994 To erase your message press 3 If you exceed the maximum allotted time for mes sage length a prompt will notify you and allow you to re record the message or send the message as it is If Voice Mail is full a message will notify you that it cannot accept your message Hang up and try again later To send the message hang up Or press and go to the next step To use the special delivery options press 1 You can per
132. d jumper the IVX500 PC beeps re jumper strap settings on the straps are set in the proper positions Refer to step peatedly and does not boot Audio Interface Card AIC 4 on page 1 6 in SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTAL up properly i e the PC LATION beeps 1 7 times pauses and then repeats See note be low for a list of error beep interpretations Incorrect strap settings on one or more of the VPCs Ensure that all VPCs have their jumper straps set in the proper positions Refer to step 5 on page 1 6 in SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION The PC should be used for IVX500 applications only If necessary delete any unneeded peripheral software and re install the VX500 applications software as outlined in SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION on page 1 17 Defective AIC VPC or PC Replace the defective card s or the PC NOTE The number of beep tones identifies the type of error that has occurred as listed below should be no other software installed on the TVX500 PC Invalid AIC interrupt was specified by the driver must be between 60 and 67 EN The AIC switch settings do not match the address specified by the driver Another card is installed at the same address that was specified for the AIC or the AIC has malfunctioned Page 5 8 Software problem NO OF BEEPS INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING Issue 1 August 1994 AS N
133. destination type is Mail box select the Mailbox drop down list box and scroll the highlight bar to the desired mailbox destination 15 14 OK CANCEL When the dial 0 destination is programmed select the OK command button to exit Or to exit without saving changes select the Cancel com mand button Page 3 64 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Ren re es LBB TERNERA RESTA eae a de AR AAA WER RS gt Z a SRR SOE RS RD BEN I ponent ei SASSER on eRe OSE e AS atcha etatatatatatatateharstatatetatanatsverercte A Days of the Week Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday LI B DAY MODE PROGRAMMING 15 15 This window appears when you select the Pro gram Day Mode command button shown on page 3 63 15 16 DAYS OF THE WEEK Select the days of the ne Pe MA AR AN m WE 09 o Pa m R y soe Fe BEI SOS OI SRD PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 ROSEN OCOD CO RARA RRE RRA ERC TIRAS Time of Day Start Time 08 00am selected day mode days enter a start and stop time in the appropriate text boxes Use 12 hour format followed by am or pm or use 24 hour format If you enter an in valid time you will see a warning message and must try week during which you wish to have the system operate in day mode When you select a check box a check mark appears to indicate that it is a day mode day To remove a check mark sele
134. e Cancel command button Page 3 44 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE LIRR IES RR Stat ist ice Mai Date aie Time of Last Logon Number of New Messages Number of Saved Messages Mailbox Percent Full Number of Times Mailbox Was 80 Full Number of Times Mailbox Was Full Number of Messages Sent Number of Messages Received Total Length of New and Saved Messages PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 Cees i Pe Ma RR a es SOS SO De ies 0 O hours O minutes Number of Times 3 Bad Passwords Were Entered 0 Subscriber Statistics Report 12 48 This window appears when the Subscriber Sta tistics command button is selected It shows the follow ing information for the selected mailbox 12 49 The statistics for this report reflect the period since the last date that the statistics were cleared Statis tics are cumulative and remain as such until cleared us ing the Report Programming window e Date and Time of Last Logon At default this dis plays None Once the subscriber logs on to the mailbox this field will reflect the most recent date and time of the last valid logon If the System Ad ministrator makes any change to a subscriber s per sonal options from the System Administrator s mailbox no change will be made to this field e Number of New Messages This is a count of the number of messages in a subscriber s new message queue It is the same numb
135. e PC 2 Attach the DB25 modular adapter supplied with the database programming cable kit to the DB9 to DB25 converter installed in step 1 3 Attach the DB9 modular adapter supplied with the database programming cable kit to a cus tomer provided ASCI type programming ter minal configured with the following parameters e The transmit and receive baud rate is 9600 e The data format is 8 bit standard ASCH e Parity is off ignored e Communication is full duplex e There is one start bit and one stop bit NOTE If the terminal requires a DB25 connec tion attach a straight through DB9 to DB25 converter to the DB9 modular adapter or attach a customer provided DB25 modular adapter 4 Plug one end of the reversing mod to mod line cord supplied with the database programming cable kit into the DB25 modular adapter installed in step 2 Plug the other end of the line cord into the DB9 modular adapter installed in step 3 DB9 to DB25 lt i alll be whe DB9 ADAPTER DB25 ADAPTER IVXS00 PC PROGRAMMING TERMINAL Page 1 17 SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE 5 6 7 Insert Applications Software Disk 2 of 4 in the floppy disk drive and reboot the PC The termi nal displays Delaying for 5 seconds Press any key to abort Before the five seconds expire press ENTER or any key on the keyboard
136. e and receive messages regard ing disk storage space Select the System Administrator Mailbox drop down list box and scroll to the desired mailbox 13 34 ENABLE VOICE MAIL DIRECTORY Se lect the Enable Voice Mail Directory check box to place a check mark in it and enable the voice mail directory To disable the directory select the check box again to re move the check mark NOTE If the voice mail mailbox directory is disabled callers using the voice mail system will not receive a O Normal 8 Loudest system prompt giving the option to search the directory for the person they wish to speak to If the dial pad key normally associated with access to the mailbox directo ry is selected the caller will be informed that the selec tion is invalid 13 35 DIRECTORY SORT ORDER Select the Di rectory Sort Order drop down list box and scroll to the desired option last name or first name to determine the directory sorting order This parameter also defines which system voice prompt will play when directing callers to spell a first or last name 13 36 VOLUME Select the Volume Level drop down list to select the volume level for all of the IVX500 System ports Scroll the highlight bar to the desired vol ume level The text adjacent to the drop down list box specifies that 8 is the softest setting O is standard and 8 is the loudest NOTE When a caller using voice mail increases or decreases the volume during the call th
137. e 3 5 e Exit If any programming changes have been made the following screen appears when Exit is selected from an application window header It offers the op tions of saving the changes that were made in the associated window and exiting to the Database Pro gramming Menu select Yes exiting to the Data base Programming Menu without saving the changes select No or returning to the program ming window to continue making changes select Cancel When selected from the Database Pro gramming Menu screen shown above Exit will end the programming session we Cee Eno o ette 5 ez 8 4 Help The Help drop down menu allows access to the on line Help files as described on page 3 6 This drop down menu also includes an entry titled About Database Programming that when selected displays the software part number and generation date If viewed after a remote programming session is started it will also show the software version number B ACCESS TO PROGRAMMING AREAS 8 5 This window also provides access to all of the pro gramming areas The programming areas can be se lected in two ways e List box When a line in the list box is highlighted that programming window can be viewed by select Page 3 15 PROGRAMMING INTER TEL PRACTICES Issue 1 August 1994 IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE ing the Program command button or by selecting the programming window enter the appropriate com highlighted line
138. e calls directing them to the de sired application WITH VOICE COMPUTER HUNT GROUPS A call rings in or is transferred to the Voice Computer Hunt Group pilot number in the telephone system An IVX500 port connected to a single line circuit that is assigned to the hunt group and programmed for Voice Computer Hunt Group operation answers the call The telephone system sends dial rules to tell the port which IVX500 application to use auto attendant call routing announcement etc The caller is connected to the appropriate application 2 3 On systems without voice computer hunt groups each port is dedicated to a specific application The ap plication is accessed by dialing the extension number of the circuit connected to the associated port On some systems the circuits can be placed in hunt groups or in forwarding arrangements that function like hunt groups Because each port can have only one applica tion systems without voice computer hunt groups may require IVX500 systems with more ports to provide all of the services required by the customer WITHOUT VOICE COMPUTER HUNT GROUPS A call rings in or is transferred to the extension number of the circuit connected to an IVX500 port Or it rings in or is transferred to a hunt group that contains that cir cuit The caller is connected to the IVX500 application that is programmed for the IVX500 port that received the call Page 4 3 APPLICATION
139. e line port that will be connected to the IVX500 circuit a Temporarily connect a single line set to the station circuit assigned the last station in the hunt group 115 in the example NOTE If using a DC ringing single line set it will ring continuously whenever on hook This is nor mal and will not affect off hook program ming procedures b Lift the handset dial the forward no answer feature code default 356 and then dial the extension number of the first station in the hunt group 112 in the example c Remove the phone and reconnect the IVX500 to the station circuit To use the hunt group arrangement the follow ing programming must be completed in the IVX500 database a Applications Programming window e Applications Programming Create the necessary IVX500 applications using the application setup instructions in this chapter e Port Programming Port Configura tion Select the appropriate application type Automated Attendant Call Routing Announcement etc for the Port Opera tion of each IVX500 port e Enable Remote Messaging Lamp Notifi cation Enable any or all of the IVX500 ports for Remote Messaging Lamp Noti INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE APPLICATION amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 fication This allows them to turn on the message waiting indications at stations in the telephone system and to place outgo ing calls b Miscellan
140. e main company greeting followed by a menu of available options In telephone systems with voice computer hunt groups internal callers will hear only the menu of options and not the company greeting Stations can forward or transfer calls directly to their mailbox using this application s extension number This ap plication can also be the message center for the sub scribers stations INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FEATURES Issue 1 August 1994 2 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT Z 1 The automated attendant is a programmable fea ture that can be used to provide automated call answer ing service Calls can transfer forward or directly ring in to an automated attendant Calls to the automated at tendant application are processed as follows CALL TO AUTOMATED ATTENDANT Automated Attendant answers and plays a greeting followed by a menu of options Call is sent to the Automated Atten dant s designated dial O operator Call is sent to sta tion hunt group voice mail or op erator destination Call is sent to station hunt group voice mail or operator destination 2 2 When an automated attendant answers a call it plays a recording that gives dialing instructions During or after the recording the caller may then directly dial a Station extension number voice mail access number if there is no associated mailbox or hunt group pilot num ber Or the caller may use the direct
141. e message notifications enter the desired extension number in the Message Noti fication Station text box 12 21 ENABLE REMOTE MESSAGING To en able remote messaging select this check box to place a check mark in it To disable remote messaging select it again to remove the check mark 12 22 PRIMARY ALTERNATE MESSAGE NO TIFICATION If remote messaging is enabled select either the Primary or Alternate Message Notification command button to program the remote messaging pa rameters A window appears as shown on page 3 42 12 23 MAILBOX IS ASSOCIATED If the mailbox is associated with a corresponding extension number on the telephone system and the telephone system is pro grammed to validate mailboxes select this check box to place a check mark in it To remove the check mark se lect the check box again 12 24 MAILBOX TYPE To determine whether the mailbox type is Standard or Receive Only select the PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 AD Se h o AS SRA ta Mailbox Initialized No Mailbox Is Associated Mailbox Type Mailbox Type drop down list box and scroll the high light bar to the desired type 12 25 MISCELLANEOUS To program additional mailbox information select the Miscellaneous com mand button A window appears as shown on page 3 44 12 26 SUBSCRIBER STATISTICS To view mail box s statistics select the Subscriber Statistics com mand button A window appears as shown on page 3 45 12 27 PAS
142. e or edit the current date You will see a warning if you enter an invalid date and you must try again 15 3 TIME The current time is shown in the Time text box If necessary enter a new time or edit the cur rent time You will see a warning if you enter an invalid time and you must try again 15 4 SET TO CURRENT DATE TIME Select this command button to automatically set the date and time of the IVX500 PC to the current date and time of the pro gramming PC 15 5 DIAL 0 DESTINATION DAY NIGHT These command buttons provide access to the windows PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 used for programming the type of device that will be used for the day and night operator destinations the ex tension number and the mailbox Select the appropriate command button to program the Dial O destination for day or night mode A window appears as shown on the next page 15 6 PROGRAM DAY MODE This command but ton provides access to the window that allows you to de termine the days of the week and times that represent day mode All other days and hours are considered night mode The window is shown on page 3 65 15 7 BAUD RATE To set the baud rate of COM 2 on the IVX500 PC for the next programming session select this drop down list box and scroll the highlight bar to the desired baud rate NOTE A change in the baud rate will not take effect until the next database programming con nection The current programming session is unaf
143. e per system H HOURGLASS SYMBOL CURSOR 4 21 Occasionally the system will change the cursor to an hourglass shape This indicates that the system is performing an internal operation and cannot respond to input Wait for the cursor to return to normal before en tering more information I MANAGING MULTIPLE WINDOWS 4 22 One of the most useful Windows features is the ability to have several windows open simultaneously Refer to your Windows user manual for detailed in formation on running multiple applications minimizing windows arranging icons and arranging windows 4 23 The window shown on page 3 15 has a drop down list box labeled Windows that includes the fol lowing options e Cascade Windows This option is used when you have several windows open Selecting this option re duces the size of the windows and arranges them in layers so that each title bar is visible The active win dow is in front and fully visible e Tile Windows This option is also used for multiple windows Selecting it reduces the size of the win dows and arranges them side by side The mouse cursor indicates the active window e Arrange Icons If you have one or more windows reduced to icons selecting this option will arrange them in a row along the bottom of the screen e List of Open Windows At the bottom of the drop down menu any open database windows are listed A check mark next to a window name indicates the currently ac
144. e procedures required for programming the single line circuits connected to IVX500 ports into hunt groups Depending on the soft ware version of your telephone system you will use one of the following programming methods With Voice Computer Hunt Groups These hunt groups can utilize dial rules and or the Voice Talk DTMF feedback feature as described below See page 4 4 for more information on dial rules eo Without Voice Computer Hunt Groups Older systems do not have voice computer hunt groups but can be programmed to function like a hunt group with the IVX500 See page 4 18 With Voice Computer Hunt Groups 5 5 In some software packages single line circuits used by the IVX500 can be programmed into a voice computer hunt group The group has a pilot number that is dialed to access the ports With a voice computer in terface the ports on the IVX500 do not have to be as signed to specific applications They are assigned as Voice Computer Hunt Group ports in the IVX500 da tabase and the dial rule string sent by the telephone sys tem determines the 1VX500 application that will be used Therefore the telephone system can have several voice computer hunt groups that all contain the same IVX500 ports However each hunt group would have a different set of dial rules to send to the IVX500 Page 4 17 1 To use the hunt groups the following program ming must be completed in the IVX500 data a Applications Programmin
145. e saved to the C drive 14 6 PRINT REPORTS The Print Reports com mand button is only available ifone of the report check boxes is marked or during a stand alone programming session When this command button is selected a win dow appears that says You are about to print the se lected reports Do you wish to continue Select Yes to print the report or No to cancel the report In a direct connection programming session as the printing starts the terminal cursor changes to an hourglass and you must wait until the report is complete before proceed ing If the system is unable to print the report an error Page 3 59 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 message will display that states The system is unable to print the selected reports If printing to a file it sug gests using another disk If using a printer it suggests that the printer may be off line or out of paper 14 7 CLEAR STATISTICS Not available in Stana Alone programming The Clear Statistics command but ton allows you to clear all accumulated statistics from the system When you select the Clear Statistics com mand button a window appears that reads You are about to clear all of the accumulated statistics Do you wish to continue Select Yes to continue or select Can cel to leave the messages unchanged 14 8 PRINT DAY To select the day for printing auto matic reports select the Print Day drop down list box and scroll the highlight b
146. e system volume level currently programmed does not change Only the volume of that call is temporarily altered When the user has completed the call the system resets the volume the setting currently established in the Volume Level drop down list box 13 37 OK CANCEL When finished select the OK command button Or to exit without saving any changes select the Cancel command button Page 3 57 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES 1VX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE nn NANA NN NN NNUNNNNNE 14 REPORTS 14 1 The voice mail system includes reporting capa bilities to print reports to a printer or to a file for storage The reports include Applications and Port Statistics Di rectory Listings by last name or first name or exten sion and Group List reporting A sample report is shown on page 3 61 The reports include the following information e Applications and Port Statistics The following in formation appears individually for each application and as a summary for all applications Description and extension number of the ap plication The description field shows the pro grammed name for the application Call Routing Announcement applications are all listed together by extension The applications are listed in the following order Quick Message Retrieval Non Subscriber Voice Mail Auto At tendant and Call Routing Announcement Auto Attendant Recall applications are reported with in
147. e voice computer hunt group use the fol lowing format lt XXX gt 1 H In place of the XXX use the number that is pro grammed for the Call Routing Announcement application in the IVX500 System in step 1 not the telephone system extension number of the single line circuit connected to the ports If the customer wants calls to ring in directly to the Call Routing Announcement application program the appropriate telephone system trunks to ring in to the single line circuit exten sion number s or hunt group pilot number associated with the application Using the Voice Mail System Administrator s mailbox record the greetings for the Call Rout ing Announcement application Follow the instructions given on page 2 18 When the prompt asks for the recording number enter the number for the day or night greeting that you se lected in step 2 Place calls to the Call Routing Announcement use the extension and or hunt group pilot num ber to ensure that the correct recordings are played during day and night modes APPLICATIONS amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Customized Call Routing Digit Translation Setup 3 6 Use the following procedure to set up a Call Rout ing Announcement Application that uses the Digit Translation feature 1 2 3 4 5 Create the application using the programming window shown on
148. ecognized by the system when a recording is being played for exam ple when a prompt or message is playing The range for this timer is 16 240 milliseconds The de fault is 32 milliseconds DTMF Detection This determines the minimum duration of DTMF tones that can be recognized by the system during playback functions for example when the system is silent and waiting for input The range for this timer is 16 240 milliseconds The de fault is 32 milliseconds NOTE If either of the DIMF timers is changed the new value will not take effect until the system is completely idle Also note that changing the DTMF Delay or DTMF Detection timer value is a trade off between improving DTMF detection and increasing the possibility that human voices will be detected as DTMF tones this is called talk off As the value of the timer is reduced DTMF detection is improved but the possibility of talk off increases As Page 3 55 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 the value is increased the possibility of talk off is re duced but the possibility of DTMF detection prob lems is increased Hookflash Duration This determines the length of hookflashes that are dialed by the system The range for this timer is 1 100 hundredths of a second 1 109 to 1 second The default is 60 hundredths 600 milli seconds Lamp Update Delay When a caller leaves a mes sage that is directed to more more than one mailbox this timer determines
149. ed select whether the recordin will be played during day mode by pressing 1 or during night mode by pressing 2 When prompted enter the desired recording number 01 50 If a recording exists it is played If not you hear a warning that the re cording has not yet been made If it is the correct recording press Return to step 6 FEATURES Issue 1 August 1994 5 DIRECTORIES AUTOMATED ATTENDANT CALL ROUTING ANNOUNCEMENT AND VOICE MAIL 5 1 There are two types of directories that can be en abled or disabled in the system Voice Mail and Auto mated Attendant The Voice Mail Directory is a list of mailbox sub scribers their recorded names and mailbox num bers e The Automated Attendant Directory provided to all Auto Attendant callers is a list of all mailbox subscribers and extension ID owners and their re corded names 5 2 The directories can be selected in the following ways e From the Voice Mail or Automated Attendant main menu Press the key e Using a Call Routing Announcement application Press the Digit Translation digit designated for di rectory access o Asa Voice Mail Subscriber Subscribers can ac cess the directory whenever they are prompted to en ter a mailbox number 53 If a directory is disabled or empty because no names are recorded for any of the system s mailboxes and extension IDs callers will not hear the prompt that allows access to the directory
150. ed during day and night modes and that the mailboxes and extension numbers can be ac cessed Allow at least one call to recall the Auto mated Attendant Recall Destination so that you can verify that it works correctly APPLICATIONS amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE B AUTOMATED ATTENDANT RECALL DESTINATION 3 3 Ifa call is transferred by the Automated Attendant application but is not answered before the telephone system Transfer timer expires the call recalls the Recall Destination application If the recall destination is the Automated Attendant Recall Destination application it announces that the station is unavailable and allows the caller to choose to leave a message if a mailbox is pro grammed for that station or dial another extension number 1 2 3 Create the application using the programming window shown on page 3 19 Enter the desired extension number for the application do not use a number that is already assigned to another ap plication When the application programming window shown on page 3 21 appears enter a description for the application Recordings are not needed the system will use standard pre recorded prompts Program the IVX500 ports as described on page 3 25 Set the Port Operation field to Voice Computer Hunt Group if the telephone system will be programmed to send voice computer dial rules
151. ed in the TVX500 data base a Applications Programming window e Applications Programming Create the necessary IVX500 applications using the APPLICATION amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 application setup instructions in this chapter e Port Programming Port Configura tion Select the Voice Computer Hunt Group application type for the Port Op eration of each IVX500 port e Enable Remote Messaging Lamp Notifi cation Enable any or all of the IVX500 ports for Remote Messaging Lamp Noti fication This allows them to turn on the message waiting indications at stations in the telephone system and place outgoing calls b Miscellaneous Information Telephone System Interface window eo System Type Select GMX 48 or IMX 2448 depending on your system type See page 3 53 in PROGRAMMING e Voice Talk If DTMF feedback tones will be enabled on the telephone system en able Voice Talk on the IVX500 by placing a check in the check box See page 3 53 in PROGRAMMING 2 Create the various voice computer hunt groups in the telephone system database following these guidelines a Station Data Specific Station Information DAA e When programming each single line cir cuit that will be attached to the IVX500 designate the circuit as a voice mail com puter station e If Voice Talk will be used enable the DTMF feedback tones flag for each port so that the KSU can send Voice Talk DT
152. edge of the Help Utility window The functions of these buttons are as follows C non This displays the Table of Contents for the On Line Help topics Search This button displays a text box window that allows you to type in a key word or phrase that you would like to locate Back After you have moved from topic to topic this allows you to back up one topic at a time each time it is selected This displays a window that shows a sequential list of the topics you have looked at You can scroll e e through the list and select the topic that you would like to view Selecting this button displays the previous topic in a series If there is no previous topic the button is dimmed and cannot be selected Selecting this button displays the next topic in a series If you are in the last topic of the series the button is dimmed and cannot be selected Page 3 7 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE 6 SYSTEM SET UP FOR PROGRAMMING 6 1 There are three methods that can be used for pro gramming the IVX500 System On site programming with an attached PC Remote programming using a modem connection Programming using a stand alone PC NOTE Stand alone programming should be used for training and demonstration purposes only Data programmed during a stand alone session cannot be transferred to the IVX500 PC using Database Save Restore 6 2 Each
153. ee A EAS E a oe o OU O ee OU sh PAREA Ee fy EE me HE DR SEERA Se a ee A 1 SS ee Boo Y Ee NG 11 11 The window shown above appears when the List Members command button is selected To deter mine the mailboxes that will be included in the list use the following procedure e ADD ALL Use the Add command button to move the highlighted mailbox from the Exclude list to the Include List or use the All command button to place all stations in the list e REMOVE NONE To remove a mailbox from the Include list highlight it and select the Remove com mand button Or to remove all mailboxes use the None command button PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 ene earns EE o es LD oe a ER 77 LORA RRA PESA ER wae se A O E ELIAS eS E 2 ue PALTA oe ee 7 ee e OK When the Include List appears as desired se lect the OK command button If you attempt to add more mailboxes to a group list than the system al lows a warning appears telling you that The sys tem allows only xxx mailboxes per group list You currently have yyy mailboxes selected Please re move zzz mailboxes from the group list Select OK to return to the window shown above and reprogram the group list e CANCEL To exit without changing the lists select the Cancel command button Page 3 33 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 Miron ADO SO sie OA me Me Go SC TAR D pea O RA Grou eae nee Pick List RET gt IRSA gt ROS
154. efer to PROGRAMMING page 3 57 as voice mail and automated attendant are too low or too high SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION No audio from IVX500 ap Loose or defective cabling Check the cabling plications such as voice between the IVX500 PC and mail and automated atten the telephone system dant Incorrect strap settings on Ensure that all VPCs have their jumper straps set one or more of the VPCs in the proper positions Refer to step 5 on page 1 6 in SPECS INSTALL Defective VPC or single Replace the defective card line card card SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION Station has message waiting Station is assigned as the Check the unassociated mailboxes to find the wait indication from voice mail message notification station ing message See FEATURES page 2 9 and but associated mailbox has for one or more unassociated PROGRAMMING page 3 39 for more informa no message mailboxes tion SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION When an automated atten Voice Computer Hunt Group Ensure that the dial rule that identifies the recall dant recall is transferred to a dial rule string is incorrect source is correct dial rule 15 in the IMX and mailbox the persons direc GMX systems See APPLICATION amp TELE tory name is not played PHONE SYSTEM SETUP pages 4 4 and 4 6 SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION Outside callers bypass ma
155. eive direct ring in calls when the system is in day and or night mode 2 5 To create an Automated Attendant application follow the instructions on page 4 5 in the APPLICA TION AND TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP section Page 2 3 FEATURES Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE a a ae EEE EeeEEEeESo B AUTOMATED ATTENDANT RECALL DESTINATION _ 2 6 When a station receives a call that has been routed through the automated attendant the call is handled by the telephone system as a transferred call If the call is not answered before the appropriate Transfer timer ex pires the call recalls the automated attendant s recall destination The recall destination is usually the Auto mated Attendant Recall Destination application which announces that the called station is unavailable and al lows the caller to choose to Jeave a message or dial another extension number CALL TO AUTOMATED ATTENDANT Automated Attendant answers and plays a greeting followed by a menu of options Called party does not answer before the Transfer timer expires Call goes to the Automated Attendant Recall Destination where caller selects option Call is sent to selected mailbox 2 7 Ifthe Recall Destination fails to answer a call it is automatically sent to the recall destination s pro grammed attendant Call is sent to station hunt group voice mail or dial O operator de
156. en you hear the System Administrator Menu list of options press 1 to send a broadcast mes sage 6 Record your message To pause while recording press 2 To continue press any key except 0 To erase and re record your message press 3 If you exceed the maximum allotted time for mes sage length a prompt will notify you and allow you to re record the message or send it If Voice Mail ts full a message will notify you that it cannot accept your message Hang up and try again later 7 When you have completed your message you have the following options If you are satisfied with your message hang up OR press for more options If you wish to hear your message press 1 If you wish to add to your message press 2 and continue your message as described in step 6 To erase and re record your message press 3 Mailbox Group List Maintenance 4 48 Using the System Administrator s mailbox the administrator may provide basic voice mail mailbox and group list system maintenance This maintenance includes the following e Record the name of a standard subscriber mailbox extension ID or a group list e Record the mailbox greeting and set personal op tions for a subscriber mailbox o Set the password for a subscriber mailbox or exten sion ID 4 49 The System Administrator does not need to know the Subscriber s password t to perform maintenance on a subscriber mailbox 4 50 TO PERFOR
157. enter format c s and press ENTER The monitor displays WARNING ALL DATA ON NON REMOVABLE DISK DRIVE C WILL BE LOST Proceed with For mat Y N Enter y for yes and press ENTER The for matting process for drive C begins and continues for several minutes After the formatting is com plete the monitor displays a format complete message and asks for a volume label Type in a volume label if desired and press EN TER The monitor displays some disk usage in formation and then the A drive programming prompt A gt SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION Issue 1 August 1994 TEL PRACTICES INTER IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE 6 7 8 If there are any other drives to format repeat steps 3 through 5 using the appropriate format drive command e g format d At the A gt prompt and with the MS DOS 6 2 Setup Disk still in the floppy disk drive press the CTRL ALT and DEL keys all at the same time to restart the system Follow the instructions displayed on the monitor to set up and install MS DOS NOTE When installing MS DOS 6 2 do not use the DoubleSpace or MemMaker utilities D INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE 7 6 After formatting the hard disk drive and installing MS DOS re install the applications software and re store the database as outlined in the following steps 1 2 Turn off the PC s AC power switch and unplug the AC powe
158. enu window 3 15 remote 3 10 save restore 3 63 stand alone 3 10 system set up 3 8 text box 3 3 windows 3 3 Programming PC modem 1 4 on site programming 3 10 remote programming 3 10 specifications 3 8 stand alone programming 3 10 troubleshooting 5 3 Q Quick message retrieval 2 2 3 17 3 20 setup instructions 4 9 R Recommended spare parts 6 1 Recording instructions for mailbox 3 39 3 44 Remote message notification 2 8 2 10 3 18 3 26 outgoing access 3 50 pager information 3 50 programming 2 15 3 39 3 41 3 42 Remote messaging capacities 1 2 Remote notification tables 3 42 3 46 3 50 Remote programming 3 10 direct connection 3 12 modem 1 4 Replacement parts ordering 6 1 recommended spares 6 1 Replay messages 2 12 forward rewind increment timer 3 56 INDEX Issue 1 August 1994 Replying to messages 2 12 Reports 3 58 Return policy 5 9 RS232 connection 1 7 COM port 3 10 3 12 S Save restore 3 63 3 67 Saving messages 2 12 Serial Parallel Port Combination Card SPC illustration 1 16 installation 1 6 Shortest message allowed timer 3 56 Software applications 1 3 1 17 database 3 9 Special delivery messages 2 13 Stand alone programming 3 10 Subscriber 2 8 2 11 Subscriber statistics 3 46 3 52 Subscriber statistics report 3 40 3 45 System administrator 2 8 2 17 3 57 System capacities 1 2 System maintenance 3 63 System passwords 3 66 System speci
159. eous Information Telephone System Interface window System Type Select Inter Tel IMX 1224 2460 or Premier ESP depending on your system type See page 3 53 in PROGRAMMING C MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION 5 7 To ensure that station users receive the proper LED and LCD message waiting indications when they receive voice mail messages perform the following telephone system database programming Station Data Specific Station Information DAA Program each of the IVX500 ports with intercom numbers that have a user name of V MAIL or some other similar identifying name eo Program each IVX500 port as a voice mail station 5 8 To ensure that the subscribers have easy access to their voice mail messages when responding to message waiting notifications program the following Station Data Specific Station Information DAA Assign the circuit connected to the Quick Message Retrieval application as the alternate message source for all of the IVX500 ports in the hunt group 5 9 The following programming must be completed in the IVX500 database to allow the IVX500 to leave mes sage waiting notifications at the stations Applications Programming Port Programming Port Configuration window Enable Remote Messaging Lamp Notification Enable any or all of the IVX500 ports for Remote Messaging Lamp Notification This allows them to turn on the message waiting indications at stations in the telephone system and to p
160. er equivalence number REN Customers connecting this board to the telephone network shall before such connection is made give notice to the telephone company of the particular line s to which such connection is to be made and shall provide the telephone company with the following information Complies with Part 68 of FCC rules FCC registration no 1A92PJ 10975 VM E Type of required interface jack RJ14 Sequence in which lines are to be connected Ringer equivalence number REN 0 3A 0 3B NOTE The REN is used to determine the quan tity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in re sponse to an incoming cali In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five 5 0 contact the telephone company to de termine the maximum REN for the calling area The telephone company should also be given notice upon final disconnection of this board from the par ticular line s It is also the responsibility of the customer to provide the telephone company with registration numbers of any other devices which are configured for connec tion to the telephone network 2 This board cannot be used on public coin service provided by the telephone company Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission
161. er that is reported to the subscriber when he or she logs in to the mailbox e Number of Saved Messages This is a count of the number of messages stored in the saved message queue for the mailbox It is the same number that is reported to the subscriber when he or she logs in to the mailbox e Mailbox Percent Full This shows the actual per centage of maximum mailbox message capacity used Number of Times Mailbox Was More Than 80 Full This shows the number of times the mailbox reached 80 of its maximum message capacity Number of Times Mailbox Was Full This displays the number of times a mailbox reached its maximum message Capacity e Number of Messages Sent This is a count of the number of times a subscriber records and sends a message to one mailbox or a group list of mail boxes replies to a message sent by another sub scriber or forwards a message with comments e Number of Messages Received This shows the number of messages a subscriber has received re gardless of where the messages came from sub scriber non subscriber or system e Total Length of New and Saved Messages This is a combined total of the amount of time represented by the Number of New Messages and Number of Saved Messages fields o Number of Times 3 Bad Passwords Were En tered This counter increases each time a single call includes three attempts to enter a mailbox and the caller uses an incorrect mailbox password combina
162. erased and any assignment of the recording to another application is unaffected CANCEL To exit without deleting any applica tions select the Cancel command button INTER TEL PRACTICES 1VX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 SOECES ES 2A ae A Bs z PEs of ee e ee DIS A Hie Calle meng Hunt ETT Port 03 Port 04 Port 05 Port 06 Port 07 Port 08 Port 09 Port 10 Actual Number of Ports Present X D PORT PROGRAMMING 9 28 This window lists of all ports on the system by port number and description To reach this window se lect the Port Programming command button shown on page 3 19 Port programming is performed as follows 9 29 ACTUAL NUMBER OF PORTS PRESENT The list box shows 16 ports However your system may not have all 16 ports installed The Actual Number of Ports Present is a reference that tells you how many ports you have on your system If you attempt to program a port that does not exist on your system you will see a warning box that indicates that the port is not physically installed You can however program the non existent port This is useful when programming is performed on one system and the database is then transferred to a larg er system using Save and Restore 9 30 PORTS To program a port highlight it in the list box and select the Program command button The win dow shown on the next page appears 9 31 OK CANCEL When port programming is complete
163. es Sent Number of Messages Received Total Length of New and Saved Messages Number of Times 3 Bad Passwords Were Entered E SUBSCRIBER SUMMARY STATISTICS 13 20 This window appears when Subscriber Summa ry Statistics is highlighted and the Program command button is selected as shown on page 3 46 It displays the following information Statistics continue to accumu late until cleared using the Report Programming win dow Number of Mailboxes This shows the number of mailboxes that have been created in voice mail Number of New Messages This is the total of the number of messages in all subscriber s new message queues Number of Saved Messages This is the total of the number of messages stored in the saved message queues for all mailboxes Average Mailbox Percent Full This shows the av erage percentage of maximum message capacity used by all mailboxes Number of Times Mailboxes Were More Than 80 Full This shows the number of times any mail box reached 80 of its maximum message capacity Number of Times Mailboxes Were Full This dis plays the number of times any mailbox reached its maximum message capacity INTER TEL PRACTICES TVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE CORA USA ye RCA is ie S o es SESS O o ee OO000 Ooo OO hours O minutes O O e Number of Mailboxes Currently More Than 80 Full This shows how many mailboxes are currently over 80 of their maximum message capacity e Nu
164. essage waiting notifications at the stations Applications Programming Port Programming Port Configuration window Enable Remote Messaging Lamp Notification Enable any or all of the IVX500 ports for turning on the message waiting indications at stations in the telephone system D MESSAGE CENTER 4 13 The extension or pilot number associated with IVX500 Non Subscriber Voice Mail application can be programmed to act as the message center for stations Then when an intercom caller calls a station that is busy or unavailable he or she can choose to leave a message at the called station s message center the Non Sub scriber Voice Mail application The IVX500 is auto matically called and the caller is connected directly to the called station s assigned mailbox and hears the called station s personal greeting 4 14 The message center designation also allows key set users to quickly and easily forward calls to their voice mailboxes To do this a keyset user presses the FWD key and then the MSG key Calls forwarded through the keyset are then sent to the keyset user s voice mailbox To use these features perform the fol lowing database programming Station Programming Individual Station In formation Miscellaneous Information win dow Program the desired stations to have the Non Subscriber Voice Mail application pilot number or extension number as the message center Hunt Group Programming window e Program the ci
165. eting Primary or Alternate or System Play Recording Instructions Yes or No Envelope Settings Date Time Message Source Message Length Directory Information Unlisted No Private Ext and Mailbox No Page 3 72 INTER TEL PRACTICES PROGRAMMING IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 FIGURE 3 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROGRAMMING MISC AUTO ATTENDANT INFORMATION Directory Sort Order Last Name or First Name CUSTOM RECORDINGS REC DESRIPTON GA a EN E OA U9 U Pa dee La gt Wi Wt w GU 6 U3 4 j 35 ran pad rA od Eo al ol A Ses e pd jura o Eh NI ef OO Ssi AE un Wi N J 2 nv ph amp NO gt Ww A pd Page 3 73 PROGRAMMING INTER TEL PRACTICES Issue 1 August 1994 IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FIGURE 3 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROGRAMMING Continued TELEPHONE SYSTEM INTERFACE FIELD INFORMATION Feature Codes Transfer Call Initiation REMOTE NOTIFICATION TABLES Make a copy of this chart for each Remote Notification Table FIELD INFORMATION Se AN ps wes O TN ee antonio nana Pager Termination String Outgoing Access String Outgoing Access Termination String VOICE MAIL INFORMATION FIELD INFORMATION o C E Page 3 74 INTER TEL PRACTICES PROGRAMMING IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 FIGURE 3 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROGRAMMING Continued TIME
166. everal windows so that specific features can be programmed easily NOTE Programmers must be properly certified on the IVX500 System to receive technical support 2 PLAN THE PROGRAMMING SESSION 2 1 Determine the features that need to be pro grammed to meet the customer s needs Then refer to the specific programs and program planning sheets For example when programming an application refer to the programming information on page 3 17 and the pro gram planning sheet on page 3 68 2 2 For detailed programming instructions for pro gramming the various IVX500 applications refer to the APPLICATION AND TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP section 3 MICROSOFT WINDOWS NOTE The following information is provided by Microsoft regarding their licensing policies 3 1 Database Programming operates in a graphics en vironment called Microsoft Windows created by Micro Disk Usage Statistics a rs Remote Notification Tables Subscriber Summary Statistics ccc cece ccc cccccccccccccccess Telephone System Interface ccc ccc cece ccc c cece ces cessceses Timers eeeoeeeseeseteeoeeeoeeeeoeseseeoeeeeeeesvsseeveeseeaeseenmesvseseeoeeeveeseeveeveeeeeeseeoeeeeoeee se H Voice Mail Information ccccccccccccccccscccccccccccecccece 3 49 3 50 3 52 3 53 3 54 3 57 3 58 3 63 3 64 3 65 3 66 3 67 0 000009000900000090000000000000000600 soft Corporation An extension of the MS DOS operating system Microsof
167. fault command button 6 22 OK CANCEL When modem programming is complete select the OK command button to save the changes Or to exit without saving changes select the Cancel command button RS ARA AAA S i aaa RARA pectin eat RARA A AA ara Modem Responses Busy 1 SRT ASA tet ie A me EERIE gt 3 EA SAS eee RR CORO Se enn Aer mE Dota TELL TIRAS EE al a Bee eS OS gt Page 3 11 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 RIRS a AaS A A EA A RO NO AS e 2T a on Be ie ee gt RSE A PRESIDE REL so Connecting A Modem Session 6 23 This window is used for making the modem con nection It can be reached by selecting Connect To Re mote System from the System Services drop down menu in the Inter Tel logo screen header 6 24 MODEM DIRECT CONNECTION Indicate whether this is a modem connection or a direct connec tion by selecting the appropriate option button The black dot appears in the selected option 6 25 COM 1 or COM 2 Indicate which COM port your PC is using for the RS 232 C connection by select ing the appropriate option button The black dot appears in the selected option 6 26 BAUD RATE Indicate the baud rate at which your PC will be operating by selecting the Baud Rate drop down list box and scrolling the highlight bar to the desired baud rate o If using a modem select the rate that matches the baud rate of the modem extension that will be used o Jf using a direct connection select the ra
168. fault recordings 01 and 02 They 8 can be retrieved by defaulting the IVX500 System If a recording has been previously made but the System Ad ministrator chooses to make a change to it the IVX500 System will play the current recording before offering the option of accepting it as it is replaying it or erasing and re recording it 4 56 The maximum recording time for each custom recording is determined in database programming when the maximum greeting lengths are established for all subscribers Page 2 18 TO RECORD CUSTOM RECORDINGS Dial the Voice Mail application access number You hear the main menu During or after the greeting press x to identify yourself as a subscriber Enter the System Administrator mailbox number and password t Press 9 to access the System Administrator s Menu When you hear the System Administrator Menu list of options press 3 to select the Record Cus tom Recordings option When prompted enter the desired recording number 01 50 If a recording exists it is played If not go to the next step To hear the recording again press 1 If you wish to leave the recording unchanged press If you wish to re record the recording press 3 and continue to the next step When prompted record the greeting or message To pause while recording press 2 To continue press any key If you exceed the maximum allotted time for re cording length a prompt will notify
169. fications 1 3 T Technical support 5 9 Telephone system interface 3 46 256 832 port systems 4 12 AXXESS system 4 30 ESP system 4 17 GLX Plus system 4 29 GMX 152D system 4 25 GMX 48 system 4 21 IMX 1224 2460 system 4 17 IMX 2448 system 4 21 installation 1 8 programming 3 53 troubleshooting 5 3 Telephone systems 1 2 4 3 Text box 3 3 Time 3 63 Timers 3 46 3 54 Tool and supplies 1 5 Troubleshooting charts 5 2 5 8 checklist 5 2 Page I 5 INDEX Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE a eee U Unlisted number extension ID 2 4 mailbox 2 21 V Validated voice mailbox numbers 2 9 256 832 port systems 4 15 AXXESS system 4 31 ESP system 4 19 GMX 152D system 4 27 GMX 48 system 4 24 IMX 1224 2460 system 4 19 IMX 2448 system 4 24 Voice computer hunt group dial string timer 3 56 Voice computer hunt groups 4 3 256 832 port systems 4 12 4 17 dial rules 4 4 DTMF feedback tones 4 4 GMX 48 system 4 21 IMX 2448 system 4 21 Voice mail 2 2 2 7 3 17 3 20 broadcast messages 2 17 custom recordings 2 18 directory 2 14 2 20 3 57 group lists 2 8 2 17 3 31 mailbox maintenance 2 17 mailboxes 2 8 2 11 messages 2 12 2 13 2 16 non subscriber 2 16 programming 3 46 3 57 subscribers 2 8 2 11 system administrator 2 8 2 17 3 57 troubleshooting 5 6 5 7 validated mailbox numbers 2 9 voice prompts 1 17 volume level 3 57
170. following in the IVX500 database Miscellaneous Information Remote Notifica tion Tables When programming the Remote No tification Tables use a trunk access code other than the LCR feature code 5 21 If the customer wants calls to ring in directly to an application program the appropriate telephone sys tem trunks to ring in to the single line circuit extension number s or hunt group pilot number associated with the application Station Data Specific Station Information DAA Make sure the circuits connected to TVX500 ports that will be receiving outside calls are programmed for ring in assignment for the appropriate trunk groups I SETTING THE DATE AND TIME 5 22 To ensure that the correct time is used by the IVX500 the following information is programmed in the IVX500 database System Maintenance window shown on page 3 63 in PROGRAMMING System Maintenance Enter current date and time or set it to match the programming PC Page 4 20 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE 6 INTER TEL GMX 48 AND IMX 2448 SYSTEMS 6 1 In order for the IVX500 to work properly with the Inter Tel GMX 48 and IMX 2448 Systems the follow ing installation and programming procedures must be performed A HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS 6 2 The IVX500 is connected to circuits on the Acces sory Port Module APM strapped for AC or DCringing depending on the type of IVX500 Voice Processing Card used B HUNT GROUP
171. for in formation 3 If this board causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify the customer in advance that service may be temporarily discontin ued But if advance notice is not practical the tele phone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also the customer will be advised of the right to file a complaint with the FCC if necessary 4 The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures which may affect the operation of this board If so the customer shall be given advance notice so that any necessary modifications can be made in order to maintain uninterrupted service 5 If trouble is experienced with this board contact a local authorized factory service representative for repairs and or warranty information The customer users and unauthorized technicians should not re pair make adjustments to or attempt to service this board in any way In the event of trouble with the telephone line s this board must be disconnected from the telephone line s If trouble ceases the board must be repaired by an authorized factory service representative If the trouble continues to occur with the board discon nected the telephone company should be notified that they have a problem If this is the case repairs or adjustments made by the telephone company will be made at their expense WARNING This board generates and uses radio fre quency e
172. form one or more of the following Steps Press 1 to mark the message private This prevents the recipient from forwarding it to other subscribers Press 2 to mark the message certified When a certified message is heard by the re cipient you will receive a receipt notice Press 3 to mark the message priority This will place your message ahead of all other waiting messages in the receiving mail box Press to cancel delivery options Press 4 to deliver the message If you wish to mark the message certified private and or priority do so before completing this step After the message has been sent you may choose cither of the following options Press 1 and enter another mailbox number to send the message to another destination Press to return to the Main Menu FEATURES Issue 1 August 1994 Personal Options 5 4 37 Personal Options allow you to customize your mailbox Each subscriber s mailbox has the following personal options e Greetings Your primary or alternate greeting is played to callers when they reach your mailbox You can change your primary greeting at any time to re flect a change in status and or record and enable an alternate greeting If you elect not to record a person al greeting the default system greeting will be used NOTE There is a database option called Play Re cording Instructions that affects mailbox greetings If this option
173. g window e Applications Programming Create the necessary IVX500 applications using the application setup instructions in this chapter e Port Programming Port Configura tion Select the Voice Computer Hunt Group application type for the Port Op eration of each IVX500 port e Enable Remote Messaging Lamp Notifi cation Enable any or all of the IVX500 ports for Remote Messaging Lamp Noti fication This allows them to turn on the message waiting indications at stations in the telephone system and place outgoing calls b Miscellaneous Information Telephone System Interface window o System Type Select Inter Tel IMX 1224 2460 or Premier ESP depending on your system type See page 3 53 in PRO GRAMMING Voice Talk If DTMF feedback tones will be enabled on the telephone system en able Voice Talk on the IVX500 by placing a check in the check box See page 3 53 in PROGRAMMING 2 Create the various voice computer hunt groups in the telephone system database following these guidelines a Station Data Specific Station Information DAA e When programming each single line cir cuit that will be attached to the IVX500 designate the circuit as a voice mail com puter station If Voice Talk will be used enable the DTMF feedback tones flag for each port so that the KSU can send Voice Talk DTMF commands to the ports e Assign the Quick Message Retrieval ap plication pilot number as t
174. ge notification station 2 9 3 39 3 41 Message storage capacity 1 3 Message waiting notification 256 832 port systems 4 15 AXXESS system 4 31 ESP system 4 19 GMX 152D system 4 26 GMX 48 system 4 23 IMX 1224 2460 system 4 19 IMX 2448 system 4 23 multiple mailboxes 2 9 troubleshooting 5 6 Page 1 3 INDEX Issue 1 August 1994 Messages back up within 2 12 deleting 2 12 forwarding 2 12 mailbox 3 39 3 44 pause 2 12 replay 2 12 replying 2 12 saving 2 12 skip ahead within 2 12 voice mail 2 12 2 13 2 16 Microsoft Windows 3 2 Minimum call progress signal duration timer 3 55 Minimum call progress silence duration timer 3 55 Minimum ring signal off on timers 3 55 Minimum timer between incoming calls timer 3 56 Miscellaneous information 3 46 MOD TAP 1 17 3 10 Modem 1 3 1 4 1 5 3 10 programming 3 11 MRA See Material return authorization MRA N New messages 2 12 Night mode 3 63 3 65 Non subscriber voice mail 2 2 2 16 3 17 3 20 setup instructions 4 10 Notification no answer detection timer 3 56 Notification number 3 42 Notification start stop time 3 42 Notification type 3 42 Number called busy timer 3 56 Number of rings before answer 3 18 3 26 O Off hook delay timer 3 56 On site programming 3 10 3 12 Option button 3 5 Optional equipment 1 5 Ordering parts 6 1 Outgoing access 3 50 Outgoing DTMF digit duration timer 3 56 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500
175. gram the application parameters as follows 9 18 DESCRIPTION Enter a name of upto 20 char acters in the Description text box Do not use Control characters 9 19 DAY NIGHT GREETING Not used for auto mated attendant recall and quick message retrieval ap plications Determine the number of the Custom Recording that will be played when this application is Day Greeting Night Greeting Recording XX called To program the recording number select the Day Greeting or Night Greeting drop down list box and scroll the highlight bar to the desired recording number 9 20 DIGIT TRANSLATION This is available in Call Routing Announcement applications only To pro gram Digit Translation select this command button A window appears as shown on the next page 9 21 OK CANCEL When all programming is com pleted for the application select the OK command but ton Or to exit without changing any application parameters select the Cancel command button na A IA nee RS aora Page 3 21 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Invalid Invalid Invalid _ O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 22 INPUT ACTION The list box shows the digit translation table for the Call Routing Announcement application being programmed The Input is the digit that the caller presses The Action is what occurs when that digit is pressed Timeout is the input that represents no digits being en
176. group pilot number The proper mailbox number is automatically dialed when the IVX500 answers the for warded call 7 16 When a call is forwarded to the hunt group it may have to try more than one port before reaching one that is available If the number of day night rings is changed to more than one ring in the IVX500 database the IVX500 will need enough time to search for an avail able port and allow the number of day night rings at the selected port before the Forward No Answer timer ex pires and the KSU retrieves that call Ensure that the fol lowing timer is set long enough to allow the IVX500 time to answer the call Timer Values AB Ensure that the Forward No Answer timer is programmed to be longer than the time it takes the call to ring at multiple ports in the Non Subscriber Voice Mail hunt group while searching for an available port 7 17 To allow stations to forward calls to voice mail the following timer and a timer in the IVX500 de scribed below must be set to prevent the forward call from recalling and reaching the main voice mail greet ing If set correctly the caller will hear the selected mailbox greeting Set the following timer in the tele phone system Timer Values AB Set the SL Dial Initiation timer to 15 seconds if set higher it will tie up DTMF receivers too long 7 18 When transferring a call to a station that is for warded to voice mail the telephone system will return silence or
177. gs for the Call Rout ing Announcement application Follow the instructions given on page 2 18 When the prompt asks for the recording number enter the number for the day or night greeting that you se lected in step 2 Place CO calls to the Call Routing Announce ment use the extension and or hunt group pilot number to ensure that the correct greetings are played during day and night modes and that the mailboxes and extension numbers can be ac cessed INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE OOO NN D QUICK MESSAGE RETRIEVAL 3 7 Only one Quick Message Retrieval application may be created for the system It serves as the alternate message source for the voice mail system so that sub scribers can have easy access to their mailboxes when retrieving messages It can also be dialed directly by sta tion users for quick access to associated mailboxes 1 2 3 4 Create the application using the programming window shown on page 3 19 Enter the desired extension number for the application do not use a number that is already assigned to another ap plication When the application programming window shown on page 3 21 appears enter a description for the application This application does not re quire recordings Program the IVX500 port as described on page 3 25 Set the Port Operation field to Voice Computer Hunt Group if the telephone system will be programmed to send voice computer dial
178. he Call Routing An nouncement application can use Digit Translation which allows the caller to press a single digit for ac cess to a mailbox the voice mail subscriber applica tion the operator the directory or to a station or hunt group that has an associated mailbox or extension ID e Quick Message Retrieval Only one Quick Mes sage Retrieval application may be created for the system It is usually programmed as the alternate message source for the Non Subscriber Voice Mail ports If so when station users to respond to message A A indications left by the voice mail ports they are prompted only for their password e Non Subscriber Voice Mail This application han dles all calls that are directed to voice mail other than Quick Message Retrieval placed by subscrib ers and non subscribers Callers will hear the main company greeting followed by a menu of available options In telephone systems with voice computer hunt groups internal callers will hear only the menu of options and not the company greeting Stations can forward or transfer calls directly to their mailbox using this application s extension number This ap plication can also be the message center for the sub scribers stations 9 3 Upto25 applications can be programmed howev er there can be only one Quick Message Retrieval ap plication In the default database extension numbers 275 299 are reserved for applications but any available extension
179. he DEL key The monitor displays the main menu of options as shown below 2 Turn off the PC s AC power switch and unplug the AC power cord STANDARD CMOS SETUP ADVANCED CMOS SETUP 3 Remove the cover from the PC by removing the ADVANCED CHIPSET SETUP screws and sliding the cover off riada cel CHANGE PASSWORD 4 Disconnect the cables on the back of the existing HARD DISK UTILITY hard disk drive and remove it from its slot in the WRITE TO CMOS AND EXIT disk drive mounting shelf A OOS A 5 If applicable Remove the frame extension 6 Use the down arrow key to highlight the AUTO brackets and the plastic slide rails from both CONFIGURATION WITH POWER ON DE sides of the existing hard disk drive and attach FAULTS option and Press the ENTER or RE them to the new hard disk drive TURN key The monitor displays Load Power On Default Values from ROM Table 6 Attach the cables that were disconnected in step Y N N 4 to the back of the new hard disk drive 7 Enter y for yes and press ENTER twice The 7 While guiding the cables carefully slide the new ae a aye Hie matmemen FCP hard disk drive into the previously vacated slot in the disk drive mounting shelf until it locks into 8 Use the up or down arrow keys to highlight the place Page 1 19 STANDARD CMOS SETUP option and press SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION INTER TEL PRACTICES Issue 1 August 1994 IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE A EEES NN NN ENTE
180. he alternate message source for all of the IVX500 ports in the hunt group APPLICATIONS amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE b Hunt Groups E e Program the circuits connected to the TVX500 ports as hunt group members e For the Non Subscriber Voice Mail and Quick Message Retrieval applica tions Answer Yes to the prompt that asks Is This A Voice Mail Voice Com puter Hunt Group For further details refer to the telephone system manual e For any other 1VX500 application type Answer No to the prompt that asks Is This A Voice Mail Voice Com puter Hunt Group and then answer Yes to the prompt that asks Is This An Automated Attendant Voice Computer Group For further details refer to the telephone system manual e Program the dial rule string and recall destination for the hunt group refer to specific applications setup instructions in this chapter for dial rules For complete details refer to the telephone system manual Without Voice Computer Hunt Groups 5 6 If using a software package that does not have voice computer hunt groups the circuit numbers con nected to the IVX500 ports should be programmed into a hunt group type arrangement as described below instead of being placed in a regular hunt group NOTE Each hunt group should contain ports that are assigned to one type of application
181. he instructions for your specific tele phone system located in this chapter For addi tional information regarding dial rules also refer to page 4 4 When programming the dial rules for the voice computer hunt group use the fol lowing format lt XXX gt 1 H nr In place of the XXX use the number that is pro grammed for the Automated Attendant applica tion in the IVX500 System in step 1 not the tele phone system extension number of the single line circuit connected to the ports If the customer wants calls to ring in directly to the Automated Attendant application program the appropriate telephone system trunks to ring in to the single line circuit extension number s or hunt group pilot number associated with the application In the telephone system program the single line circuit or pilot number associated with the Auto mated Attendant Recall Destination created in step 4 to serve as the recall destination for the of the Automated Attendant circuits or hunt group Using the Voice Mail System Administrator s mailbox record the greetings for the Automated Attendant application Follow the instructions given on page 2 18 When the prompt asks for the recording number enter the number for the day or night greeting that you selected in step 2 Place intercom and CO calls to the Automated Attendant use the extension and or hunt group pilot number to ensure that the correct greetings are play
182. he mouse drags the box up or down and scrolls through the list 4 10 To program a highlighted item in the list box se lect an appropriate command button like the Program command button shown in several windows in the win dow Or if using a mouse double click on the list box item to gain access to the programming window C DROP DOWN LIST BOX EXAMPLE 4 11 When selected a drop down list box becomes a list box as shown below To select an item use the up or down arrow key to move the highlight bar When dese lected closed the list box will show the chosen option 4 12 To open a drop down list box do one of the fol lowing e Mouse Point the cursor at the arrow and click the left mouse button Scroll through the list as de scribed above for list boxes To close the box point to the arrow and click again Keyboard Commands Highlight it and press ALT V To close the box press ALT 4 To scroll through the list without opening the drop down box highlight the box and press Y and 4 4 13 When scrolling through the list you cannot wrap to the beginning of the list after reaching the end or wrap to the end from the beginning The list is linear and will stop when you reach the beginning or ending entry D COMMAND BUTTON 4 14 Selecting a command button executes a single command or allows access to another window If the command is followed by an ellipsis it will call up a window T
183. he single line circuit extension num ber s or hunt group pilot number associated with the application If remote messaging to outside numbers will be used ensure that the single line circuits con nected to the IVX500 ports with Remote Mes sage Lamp Notification enabled have outgoing access permission and the proper toll restrictions for the trunks in the telephone system INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE 10 APPLICATION amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 Using the Voice Mail System Administrator s 11 Place calls to the Non Subscriber Voice Mail mailbox record the greetings for the Non Sub scriber Voice Mail application Follow the instructions given on page 2 18 When the prompt asks for the recording number enter the number for the day or night greeting that you se lected in step 2 Page 4 11 use the extension and or hunt group pilot num ber to ensure that the correct greetings are played during day and night modes and that the mailboxes can be accessed APPLICATIONS amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE 4 INTER TEL AND PREMIER 256 AND 416 832 PORT SYSTEMS 4 1 In order for the IVX500 to work properly with the IMX 256 IMX 416 832 GMX 256 GMX 416 832 ESPDX or ESPMDX Systems the following installa tion and programming procedures must be performed A HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
184. hen select Run from that menu A window with a text box appears In the Command Line text box enter A SETUP or B SETUP if the B drive is used Then select the OK command button A Welcome window appears Select the Continue command button to proceed with the installation Or select Exit to cancel the installation When the window shown at the bottom of this page appears follow these steps a If you want to change the installation drive and or directory select the Set Location command button A window appears that al lows you to enter a new drive and or directo ry Then select Continue to save the new drive and return to the window Or to leave Install to Drive and Base Directory C AVM Installation Options x Maintain a copy of the default database Installation Drive CA Space Required Space Available 7451 K 43655 K 8 9 10 Page 3 9 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 the drive unchanged select the Back com mand button To cancel the installation you can select the Exit command button b Ifyou want to preserve an existing database make sure the check box in the Installation Options section is selected has an X in it c To continue with the installation select the Install command button Or to cancel the software installation select the Exit com mand button Another window appears that shows the names of the files as they are being copied and the pe
185. hile the system waited for a digit to be entered e OK CANCEL When finished select OK to return to the window shown on the previous page Or select Cancel to exit without saving changes Page 3 23 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 DER ARSS A AAN ESAS O o Paapaa e eee foie is E de a O a ie E A P UE A AA 2 C DELETING APPLICATIONS 9 27 The window shown above appears when the De lete Applications command button is selected To deter mine the applications that will be deleted use the following procedure o ADD ALL Use the Add command button to move the highlighted application from the Pick List to the Applications To Delete list or use the All command button to place all applications in the list REMOVE NONE To remove an application from the Applications To Delete list highlight it and se Page 3 24 apli sations P IE e Re x INTER TEL PRACTICES 1VX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE CELE BEERS SSS SSS RSS es ee gt ee AMPEG A LOL Ped ie or SO S eenas Le Gra E EE ee OS RICO lect the Remove command button Or to remove all applications use the None command button OK When the Include List appears as desired se lect the OK command button A window appears that asks you to verify that you want the applications deleted To delete them select Yes To leave them unchanged select No If a Custom Recording had been assigned to the deleted application the record ing is not
186. his applica tion does not use Digit Translation Create mailboxes for the station users Subscrib ers and create a System Administrator See page 3 35 for mailbox programming instructions and page 3 57 for miscellaneous voice mail in formation programming instructions Initialize at least one mailbox for testing purposes If the subscribers wish to use Group Lists for leaving messages program the lists by following the directions given on page 3 31 If Remote Notification will be used for placing outside calls program the Remote Notification Tables as explained on page 3 50 Message lamp notification is performed through intercom calls Remote notification is used only for calls to pagers and personal numbers Program the IVX500 ports as described on page 3 25 Set the Port Operation field to Voice Computer Hunt Group if the telephone system will be programmed to send voice computer dial rules set it to Non Subscriber Voice Mail if the telephone system does not have voice com puter hunt groups If desired change the Number of Rings Before Answer field and enable the Re mote Messaging Lamp Notification option Systems without Voice Computer Hunt Groups If desired program one or more single line circuits connected to the 1IVX500 Non Sub 8 2 Page 4 10 scriber Voice Mail ports as members of hunt group in the telephone system Systems with Voice Computer Hunt Groups If the telephone system
187. how long the system will wait between the consecutive message lamp updates That is after lighting the message lamp at the first mailbox s station the system will allow this timer to expire before it will place the call to the next mail box s station to light its message lamp The range for this timer is 1 30 seconds The default is 10 seconds Loop Current Loss This determines the minimum amount of time the system must detect loss of loop current before it will disconnect a call The range for this timer is 1 1000 hundredths of a second 1 199 to 10 seconds The default is 19 09 1 second Maximum Greeting Length This is the maximum time allowed for all mailbox greetings and custom recordings The range for this timer is 1 15 minutes The default is 1 minute Minimum Call Progress Signal Duration This timer determines the minimum duration of a period of sound necessary for the system to detect sound That is if a period of silence is broken by a burst of sound on the line and that sound is shorter than this timer the system will ignore the sound This timer applies to outgoing remote notification calls only The range for this timer is 1 100 hundredth seconds The default is 8 hundredths Minimum Call Progress Silence Duration This timer determines the minimum duration of a period of silence necessary for the system to detect silence That is if a period of sound is broken by silence and the silence is shorter than this ti
188. hrough the Mailbox drop down list box to select the desired destination If the Action is Transfer To Extension enter the desired extension number in the Extension text box e OK CANCEL When finished select OK to return to the window shown on the previous page Or select Cancel to exit without saving changes PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 Transfer Destinatio Mailbox Extension 9 26 For Timeout The window shown above appears when you select the Program command button while Timeout is highlighted e ACTION Scroll through the drop down list box to the desired Action for the digit being programmed NOTE If you select Transfer To Operator and there is not a programmed Operator Access Dial 0 Des tination in System Maintenance window see page 3 63 you will see a warning message Go to that window and program the Operator Access Destina tions o TRANSFER DESTINATION If the Action is Transfer To Extension or Transfer To Mailbox scroll through the Transfer Destination drop down list box to select the desired destination e TIMEOUT TIMER Scroll through the Timeout Timer drop down list box to the desired timer value 0 60 This determines how long the application will wait after the recording has played for input from the caller before the Timeout Action is taken Because there are no default digit translations this timer defaults to zero to prevent the delay in call pro cessing that would occur w
189. hunt group would use dial rule 275P Use the number that is programmed for the desired application in the IVX500 System not the telephone system pilot number or an extension num ber of a single line circuit connected to an IVX500 port Field 2 Optional The dial rule that identifies the destination extension or recall source Use one of the following dial rules followed by a pound sign in quotation marks For all applications except the Automated Atten dant Recall Destination Use the original des tination extension dial rule This is dial rule 4 in the Inter Tel and Premier systems This dial rule identifies the station that was originally called if several stations have chained forwards that end at voice mail For example If someone dialed extension 200 which was forwarded to extension 202 which was in turn forwarded to the voice computer hunt group the telephone sys tem would tell the IVX500 System that the call was originally intended for extension 200 and would not indicate that the call came from 202 For Automated Attendant Recall Destinations Use the recall source dial rule dial rule 15 in the Inter Tel and Premier systems This dial rule dials the intercom number of the station that re ceived a transfer recall The basic operation is the same as dial rule 4 described above except that this rule is intended for entering the voice computer hunt group through a recall and di
190. ial communications ports Specially designed Audio Interface Card AIC Specially designed Voice Processing Cards VPCs both AC ringing and DC ringing two port and four port versions are available e Specially designed applications software e Capacity to house at least five full size 16 bit cir cuit cards one for the Disk Controller Card and one for each of the up to four VPCs e Optional parallel port and printer for producing vari ous reports e Optional ASCH type programming terminal for diagnostics and if necessary for loading voice prompts only 4 3 For remote database programming and mainte nance diagnostics an external modem is also needed See PROGRAMMING page 3 10 for additional in formation on remote system access B APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE 4 4 Each new IVX500 PC is shipped with the applica tions software already installed on the hard disk drive In addition 3 4 inch floppy disks containing the applica tions software are also included For information on the IVX500 database programming software also included with the system refer to the programming PC specifica tions on the next page C AUDIO INTERFACE CARD 4 5 The Audio Interface Card AIC is a specially designed software key circuit card that allows the ap plications software to properly control certain PC functions It also provides a watchdog timer function The system will not operate properly without this card D VOICE PROCESSI
191. ice Mail This timer defines the maximum amount of time that the system will pause during the playback of a message or recording The range for this timer is 1 240 seconds The default is 30 se conds Personal Number No Answer This timer defines the amount of time the system will wait between out going call attempts whenever a message notification attempt to a personal number is unanswered The range for this timer is 1 255 minutes The default is 30 minutes Recomnect Delay This timer determines how long the system will wait after dialing the Reconnect fea ture code before prompts are played The range for this timer is 0 5 seconds The default is 2 seconds Replay Forward Rewind Increment This timer determines the number of seconds a message or re cording will be advanced or backed up when a user skips ahead or backward during a replay The range for this timer is 1 60 seconds The default is 5 se conds Shortest Message Allowed This is the length of the shortest message that will be accepted by the system Messages terminated with are always allowed re gardless of length The range for this timer is 1 5 seconds The default is 3 seconds Voice Computer Hunt Group Dial String When a port is programmed to receive voice computer hunt group data from the telephone system this timer de termines the amount of time the system will wait for each digit of a voice computer hunt group dial string sent by the telephone system
192. ice computer interface the ports on the VX500 do not have to be assigned to specific ap plications They are assigned as Voice Computer Hunt Group ports in the IVX500 database and the dial rule string sent by the telephone system determines the IVX500 application that will be used Therefore the telephone system can have several voice computer hunt groups that all contain the same 1VX500 ports Howev er each hunt group would have a different set of dial rules to send to the IVX500 Page 4 12 amp y A ab f 5 in PROGRAMMING 2 Create the various voice computer hunt groups in 1 To use voice computer hunt groups the follow ing programming must be completed in the IVX500 database a In the Applications Programming window Applications Programming Create the necessary IV X500 applications using the application setup instructions in this chapter Port Programming Port Configura tion Select the Voice Computer Hunt Group application type for the Port Op eration each IVX500 port Enable Remote Messaging Lamp Notifi cation Enable any or all of the IVX500 ports for turning on the message waiting indications at stations in the telephone system b In the Miscellaneous Information Tele phone System Interface window th System Type Select the appropriate sys tem Note that there are two options for each of the 256 and 416 832 port sys tems depending on whether standard or
193. identify yourself as a subscriber 3 Enter your mailbox number and personal pass word If message forwarding is enabled the prompt will remind you 4 When you hear the Main Menu list of options press 5 to select the Remote Messaging Menu 5 Press 1 tosetupa Primary destination or press to set up an Alternate destination A prompt a Press 1 to turn remote messaging on or off If turning it on press 1 to enable pager noti fication or press 2 to enable personal num ber notification Then press 1 to have it notify you for any new message or press to have it notify you on priority messages only NOTE You cannot enable remote mes saging until a telephone number has been programmed b Press 2 to set up or change the telephone number Then enter the telephone number followed by 4 It will play back for your verification c Press 3 to set up the time of day Then when prompted enter the time at which you wish to have the message notification start and stop Enter the times with two digits for the hour and two digits for the minutes If en tering the time in 12 hour format you will be prompted to press 1 for AM or press 2 for PM NOTE If you wish to have 24 hour no tification program the starting and ending times to be the same d Press 4 to set up the days of week for re mote messaging Then press 1 for messag ing Monday Friday 2 for all days or 3 to select individual day
194. ime is incorrect e Callers from the telephone system unable to hear any voice prompts When power is turned on the IVX500 PC beeps re peatedly and does not boot up properly INTER TEL PRACTICES TROUBLESHOOTING IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 FIGURE 5 1 TROUBLESHOOTING CHART SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION Telephone system unable to Programming error Make sure the appropriate number of ports are communicate with IVX500 assigned to each IVX500 application See PRO PC GRAMMING page 3 25 Also make sure the telephone system s single line ports are pro grammed properly See the APPLICATION TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP section AC version VPCs must be connected to AC ring ing single line circuits and DC version VPCs must be connected to DC ringing single line circuits IVX500 PC not detecting ring signals will not an swer If necessary adjust the minimum ring signal on off timers See PROGRAMMING page 3 54 Check the cabling connecting the telephone sys tem to the PC Loose or defective cabling between the telephone sys tem and the IVX500 PC Defective single line card or Replace the defective card VPC SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION Programming PC unable to Programming error Make sure the COM port and baud rate designa communicate with IVX500 tions are set correctly See PROGRAMMING PC the monitor m
195. in The telephone system s Try setting the timer to a lower value Refer to the system greeting instead Voice Mail Computer Dial telephone system s installation manual they hear directory instruc ing Delay timer is set too tions or invalid number re high sponse The IVX500 Voice Comput er Hunt Group Dial String timer is set too high Try setting the timer to a lower value See page 3 54 in PROGRAMMING Page 5 7 TROUBLESHOOTING INTER TEL PRACTICES Issue 1 August 1994 IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FIGURE 5 1 TROUBLESHOOTING CHART CONT D SYMPTOM The IVX500 PC date and or time is incorrect PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION The IVX500 PC may have Set the correct date and time using the System been set to match the pro Maintenance window See page 3 63 in PRO gramming PC and the pro GRAMMING gramming PC was incorrect SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION Callers from the telephone Tip and ring are reversed on Make sure the modular jack assemblies connected system unable to hear any DC ringing VPCs to the IVX500 PC are wired correctly See Figure voice prompts however 1 1 on page 1 8 when a test set is connected to the single line circuit voice prompts can be heard SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION When power is turned on Incorrect DIP switch or Ensure that the AIC DIP switches an
196. in a single call This announcement message will be sent to the affected mailbox each time this situa tion occurs It is received as a new message and is accompanied by a message envelope Saved Messages are messages that you previously listened to and saved You can play them back as necessary in the order they were saved 4 35 Whenever you access Voice Mail as a subscriber you are told how many new and saved messages you have From the Main Menu 1 Press 1 to listen to your new messages 2 OR Press 3 to listen to your saved messages The system plays each message in the queue se lected preceded by an envelope that tells you the information you have enabled in Personal Options While you are listening to a message you can use the following options Press E to back up while listening to a message The amount of time is determined by the Replay Forward Rewind Increment timer Press 2 to pause for the length of the data base programmed Pause Voice Mail timer To continue listening press any key To exit without completing the message press Press 3 to skip ahead while listening to a message or skip to the next message if a mes sage is not playing The amount of time is determined by the Replay Forward Rewind Increment timer Press 5 to play the message envelope again Press 6 to raise the volume Press 4 to lower the volume Press 4 to skip to the end of the recording
197. in the IVX500 data base For example a hunt group of Automated Atten dant ports a hunt group of Non Subscriber Voice Mail ports etc 1 Create a hunt group arrangement like the one de scribed in the programming example below In the example the station circuits for extension numbers 112 113 114 and 115 are connected to four ports of an IVX500 The hunt group ar rangement is programmed as follows Station Data Specific Station Information DAA e Intercom number 112 Designate intercom number 113 as the secretarial intercept e Intercom number 113 Designate intercom number 114 as the secretarial intercept e Intercom number 114 Designate intercom number 115 as the secretarial intercept e Intercom number 115 Do not designate a secretarial intercept Designate the attendant as NONE for all IVX500 extensions so that the cancel for ward feature cannot be used 2 The following programming steps must also be 3 4 Page 4 18 completed on the telephone system Station Data Specific Station Information DAA o When programming each single line circuit that will be attached to the IVX500 desig nate the circuit as a voice mail station o Assign the circuit connected to the Quick Message Retrieval application as the alter nate message source for all of the IVX500 ports in the hunt group Complete the following programming using a station instrument connected to the singl
198. ion easier use this checklist when preparing to install the system Establish Suitable Environmental Conditions 6 3 Like the telephone system itself the IVX500 Sys tem must be installed under suitable environmental conditions Refer to the telephone system s installation manual for a complete list of conditions Assemble The Necessary Tools And Supplies 6 4 Ifthe single line card in the telephone system is al ready terminated on the MDF backboard the only tools and supplies needed are Industry standard two pair four conductor twist ed cable Four conductor modular jack assemblies one for every two IVX500 ports installed Two pair non reversing straight through mod to mod line cords one for every two IVX500 ports installed NOTE To use standard two pair reversing tele phone line cord instead tip and ring for both ports must be switched at the modular jack assembly Standard telephone hand tools and the mounting hardware for the modular jack assemblies IBM compatible personal computer for on site or stand alone remote system programming refer to page 1 4 for specifications Test set and digit grabber for troubleshooting system problems if necessary 6 5 If the single line card in the telephone system is not terminated on the MDF backboard the following items are also needed Standard terminal block 66M1 50 type bridging clips and mounting hardware
199. ional restrictions Page viii INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE WARRANTY Issue 1 August 1994 LIMITED WARRANTY For a period of one 1 year from the date of shipment to Buyer INTER TEL warrants the Equipment except for fuses and lamps to be free from defects in material workmanship or both and to comply with specifica tions for the Equipment as set forth in the Installation and Field Maintenance Manual Buyer s sole and ex clusive remedy for breach of this Limited Warranty shall be to have the defective Equipment or parts re paired or replaced at INTER TEL s option Shipping costs incurred returning warranty work to INTER TEL shall be paid for by the Buyer This Limited Warranty extends only to the Buyer not to any customer user or third party This Limited Warranty does not apply to Equipment or parts damaged by improper handling normal wear and tear accidents lightning damage neg ligence or improper use or maintenance and does not apply to Equipment altered without authorization by INTER TEL This Limited Warranty does not extend to any Claims suits damages liabilities costs and ex penses arising from any act action or inaction of Buyer Although the Moss Magnuson Act should not apply in the event that it is held to apply by a court of competent jurisdiction the implied warranty of fitness for a par ticular purpose shail extend for the one year 1 year period from the
200. ions begin on page 4 12 The systems dis cussed in this section include the following Inter Tel And Premier 256 And 416 832 Port Sys tems IMX 256 IMX 416 832 GMX 256 GMX 416 832 ESPDX and ESPMDX e Inter Tel IMX 1224 2460 And Premier ESP Systems e Inter Tel GMX 48 And IMX 2448 Systems Inter Tel GMX 152D System e Inter Tel GLX Plus System Inter Tel AXXESS System 2 USING VOICE COMPUTER HUNT GROUPS AND VOICE TALK 2 1 Some Inter Tel and Premier telephone systems have Voice Computer Hunt Groups and or a DTMF feedback feature called Voice Talk These features work with the IVX500 System to provide a more efficient user interface for the IVX500 applications Several instruc tions in this section refer to programming dial rules The following is an explanation of how the voice computer hunt groups use dial rules A HOW DO VOICE COMPUTER HUNT GROUPS WORK 2 2 With a voice computer interface the ports on the IVX500 do not have to be assigned to specific applica tions They are assigned as Voice Computer Hunt Group ports in the IVX500 database When the voice computer hunt group receives a call the telephone sys tem sends dial rules that tell the IVX500 which applica tion to use Therefore the telephone system can have several voice computer hunt groups that all contain the Same single line circuits connected to IVX500 ports The dial rules for each voice computer hunt group act as the navigator for th
201. ip tions are programmed as shown on page 3 48 Program the Automated Attendant directory in formation as described on page 3 47 Create a Automated Attendant Recall Destina tion for the Automated Attendant application as described on the next page For stations to receive calls through the Auto mated Attendant application they must have a mailbox or extension ID programmed to match their telephone system extension number See page 3 35 for mailbox programming instruc tions and page 3 27 for extension ID program ming instructions Program the IVX500 ports as described on page 3 25 Set the Port Operation field to Voice a Computer Hunt Group if the telephone system SHIPSEPIOETERINED To send voice computer dial rules set it to Automated Attendant if the tele phone system computer hunt groups If desired change the Number of Rings Before Answer field The Remote Mesgaging Lamp Notification option should also be en abled 7 8 9 10 11 Page 4 5 Systems without Voice Computer Hunt Groups If desired program one or more single line circuits connected to IVX500 Automated Attendant ports as members of hunt group in the telephone system Systems with Voice Computer Hunt Groups If the telephone system has voice computer hunt group capabilities the single line circuits con nected to the IVX500 ports can be placed in a voice computer hunt group that uses dial rules Follow t
202. is considered unsuccessful It will retry the personal number after verifying that the times and days are valid when checking the mailbox number 4 26 The IVX500 System can process up to two re mote message notification calls outside of the system si multaneously 4 27 Refer to page 2 15 for subscriber instructions on setting up remote messaging Page 2 10 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FEATURES Issue 1 August 1994 E SUBSCRIBER USE OF VOICE MAIL 4 28 Voice Mail subscriber features include the fol lowing Listen to new messages if any Send a message Listen to saved messages if any Set personal options e Set up remote messaging if enabled 4 29 When a subscriber enters the mailbox the Voice Mail application may play one of the following mes sages e Mailbox almost full or full Tf a mailbox is full no new messages can be received at that mailbox until the subscriber deletes waiting or saved messages e Message count A prompt tells the subscriber how many messages are waiting to be heard if any and how many are priority messages e Remote messaging A prompt will indicate whether primary or alternate remote messaging is selected when remote messaging is enabled It will also alert the subscriber if a programming error has been de tected and or whether it encountered busy system re sources when attempting to place a remote messag ing Call Access To A Mailbox 4 3
203. is described separately on the following pages Only one programming session can be in opera tion at a time 6 3 The programming computer must be an IBM AT compatible personal computer PC with a minimum of 80286 or higher microprocessor 80386 recom mended Page 3 8 5 megabytes MB available memory on the hard disk drive 31 inch 1 44MB double sided high density flop py disk drive Windows 3 1 MS DOS 3 3 or higher MS DOS 6 2 recom mended 1 MB available RAM 2 MB recommended EGA or better graphics monitor VGA recom mended COM port RS 232 C serial communications port A programming mouse is optional but recom mended if a serial mouse is used install on an unassigned COM port A 1200 or 2400 baud internal or external modem is required for remote programming INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE ep ep A INSTALLING THE PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE 6 4 The following instructions assume that Windows 3 1 software is installed on the programming PC and the user is familiar with Windows procedures To install the programming software follow these steps 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Ensure that Windows 3 1 is running Open the Program Manager Ensure that the Pro gram Manager Option for Minimize on use is not enabled Insert Database Programming Disk 1 into the PC floppy disk drive A or B Select the File drop down menu in Program Manager T
204. is enabled the system prompt that tells the caller to leave a message after the beep will play after the primary or alternate greeting If disabled the beep will occur as soon as the primary or alter nate greeting ends In the default state this option is enabled For programming information refer to pages 3 39 and 3 44 in PROGRAMMING e Directory Name Your recorded name is used to identify you in the directory and to verify your mail box number when messages are addressed to you by 6 non subscribers and other subscribers Although your name is recorded when you first set up your mailbox you can change it at any time e Password Your password is used to prevent unau thorized access to your mailbox Although you create a personal password when you first set up your mailbox you can change it at any time e Message Envelope Contents Each message is pre ceded by an envelope message that can include 7 time date the message was left the source of the message and the length of the message You can choose the contents of the envelope that is played before each message or disable the envelope com pletely Even if the envelope is disabled the sub scriber can still enter the code to play the envelope when listening to the message 4 38 TO PROGRAM PERSONAL OPTIONS 1 Dial the Voice Mail application access number 8 You hear the main menu 2 During or after the greeting press to identify yourself as a s
205. its can be pro grammed for use by the subscriber when retrieving messages Miscellaneous Information The miscellaneous parameters that can be programmed for each mail box include the following The Miscellaneous In formation window also includes for reference purposes the length of the recorded name primary greeting and alternate greeting Mailbox Message Capacity The mailbox can be programmed to hold 1 120 minutes of messages Default capacity is 30 minutes Maximum Non Subscriber Message Length Maximum non subscriber messages can be set to a value between one minute and the Maximum Mailbox Message Capacity setting Default length is 5 minutes Maximum Outgoing Message Length The length of outgoing messages by this subscriber can be 1 120 minutes Default length is 5 min utes Greeting Selection The system greeting the mailbox primary greeting or the mailbox alter PROGRAMMING INTER TEL PRACTICES Issue 1 August 1994 IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE nate greeting can be enabled The greeting selec tension and mailbox number extension and tion defaults to the system greeting mailbox number are not announced in directory but the number can be dialed There are no pri Play Recording Instructions If this option is en vate or unlisted numbers in the default state abled the system prompt that tells the caller to leave a message after the beep will play after the e Subscriber Sta
206. ives have a sett o ta f T label with the necessary setup information on it External Cache Memory t Disabled Password Checking Option 2 10 Ensure that the other fields are set as shown in the Shadow RAM Option 3 box above Ifnot use the up or down arrow keys a RELOCATION i to highlight the desired field then use the PG UP or PG DN keys to change the setting NOTE Be sure to set the System Boot Up Se quence field to A C and the External Cache 11 Press the ESC key to exit The monitor again Memory field to Disabled displays the main menu of options Sample 3 12 Use the up or down arrow keys to highlight the ADVANCED CMOS SETUP option and press ENTER twice The monitor displays the Ad vanced CMOS Setup screen Depending on the specific BIOS and its defaults the screen should appear similar to one of the following samples Sample 1 Typematic Rate Programming Disabled Typematic Rate Delay msec 509 Typematic Rate Chars Sec 15 Above 1 MB Memory Test Enabled Memory Test Tick Sound Enabled Memory Parity Error Check Enabled Hit lt DEL gt Message Display Enabled Hard Disk Type 47 RAM Area 01300 System Boot Up Num Lock Weitek Processor Floppy Drive Seek At Boot System Boot Up Sequence At C3 Cache Memory Disabled Password Checking Option Disabled Video ROM Shadow C909 16K Disabled Video ROM Shadow C400 16K Disabled Adaptor ROM Shadow C8 0 16k Disabled On Absent Enabled t 3 t 2 Wait For lt
207. justed to allow the IVX500 to recognize busy signals when placing a call Timer Values AB Change the Camp On timer to 10 seconds default is 3 seconds F VALIDATED MAILBOX NUMBERS 5 14 This feature affects calls transferred to voice mail or placed through an automated attendant on the IVX500 If all mailbox numbers and extension IDs match extension numbers are associated the Vali date Voice Mailbox Numbers option should be enabled to allow the system to check that the number entered by the caller is valid If there are mailbox numbers that do not match an extension number non associated there is no need to validate and this option should be disabled 5 15 If the telephone system is programmed to validate voice mailbox numbers and the caller dials a number that does not have an associated mailbox on the TVX500 the number will be considered invalid even ifa non associated mailbox with that number exists Miscellaneous System Data AF 1 all mail boxes and extension IDs on the IVX500 are marked as associated and match the extension numbers in the telephone system enable the Voice Mail Validation flag Page 4 19 APPLICATIONS amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE G CALL FORWARDING 5 16 Station users can select the call forwarding fea ture to send calls to the Non Subscriber Voice Mail ap plication When the forwarded call is
208. lace outgoing calls D MESSAGE CENTER 5 10 The IVX500 Non Subscriber Voice mail applica tion can be programmed to act as the message center for stations Then when an intercom caller calls a station that is busy or unavailable he or she can choose to leave a message at the called station s message center the Non Subscriber Voice Mail application The IVX500 is automatically called and the caller is connected directly to the station user s assigned mailbox The caller hears the station user s personal greeting 5 11 To use the message center feature perform the following telephone system database programming Database Programming DAA Program the de sired stations to have the Non Subscriber Voice Mail extension number or pilot number as the message center Hunt Groups E e Program the circuits connected to the IVX500 ports as hunt group members o Answer Yes to the prompt that asks Is This A Voice Mail Voice Computer Hunt Group E CAMP ON TONES 5 12 When callers hear busy signals when calling the IVX500 they can simply wait off hook camp on until the called port is available To prevent the camp on tones from being sent to the TVX500 perform the fol lowing database programming in the telephone system Station Data Specific Station Information DAA Program all the IVX500 single line cir cuits to disallow camp on tones 5 13 If Voice Talk is not enabled the Camp On timer must be ad
209. lamp notification is en abled the system will be allowed to use this port to place outgoing calls for remote messaging to pagers and per sonal number and for message waiting lamp notifica tion to the stations in the telephone system To enable this option select the check box to place a check mark in it To remove the check mark select the box again NOTE Ensure that ports with this option enabled have outgoing access for trunks in the telephone system if the y will be used for remote notification to outside num bers 9 35 NUMBER OF RINGS BEFORE ANSWER This parameter indicates the number of ring cycles the system must detect before it will answer a call on this port By default it is set to one ring cycle The allowed range is 1 10 cycles Enter the desired values in the Day Mode and Night Mode text boxes To return either value to default select the Default command button below the appropriate text box 9 36 OK CANCEL When the port is programmed as required select the OK command button to exit Or to exit without saving changes select the Cancel Com mand button Page 3 26 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 Windows Preferences Exit Help Ea oes peat RTS ore eine 10 EXTENSION ID PROGRAMMING 10 1 Extension IDs provide the Auto Attendant ap plication a means for transferring calls to extensions which do not have mailboxes An extension ID allows the
210. llowed Select the OK command button to return to the window shown above l 11 5 DELETE GROUP LISTS To delete a group list select the Delete Group List command button A window appears as shown on page 3 34 Page 3 31 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE rors o Description po Group List Number 11 6 DESCRIPTION Enter a name for the group list up to 20 characters in the Description text box Do not use Control characters 11 7 GROUP LIST NUMBER Enter the desired number in the text box If you attempt to enter an inval id number a number that begins with 0 or a number that is already assigned you will see a warning window Se lect OK to continue and then select a valid number 11 8 LIST MEMBERS To determine the mailboxes that will be included in the group list select the List Members command button The window shown on the next page appears 11 9 OK When finished programming the group list select the OK command button If you did not assign mailboxes to this group list you will receive a warning that says This group list does not contain any mail boxes Is this correct Select Yes to continue or select No to return to the window shown above 11 10 CANCEL To exit without changing the group list select the Cancel command button Page 3 32 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE RRA ony at at ee oe e
211. mal and will not affect off hook program ming procedures b Lift the handset dial the forward no answer feature code default 356 and then dial the extension number of the first station in the hunt group 112 in the example c Remove the phone and reconnect the TV X500 to the station circuit To use the hunt group arrangement the follow ing programming must be completed in the IVX500 database a Applications Programming window Applications Programming Create the necessary IVX500 applications using the application setup instructions in this chapter e Port Programming Port Configura tion Select the appropriate application type Automated Attendant Call Routing Announcement etc for each IVX500 port e Enable Remote Messaging Lamp Notifi cation Enable any or all of the IVX500 ports for Remote Messaging Lamp Noti fication This allows them to turn on the APPLICATIONS amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE gg PP IE EEE E PPrrrcccrmenenoned message waiting indications at stations in the telephone system and to place outgo ing calls b Miscellaneous Information Telephone System Interface window System Type Select GMX 152D See page 3 53 in PROGRAMMING e Voice Talk The GMX 152D does not support the Voice Talk feature C MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION 7 5 To ensure that station users receive the proper
212. mber of Mailboxes Currently Full This shows the number of mailboxes that are currently at their maximum capacity e Number of Messages Sent This is a count of the number of times subscribers have recorded and sent messages to one mailbox or a group list of mail boxes replied to a message sent by another sub scriber or forwarded a message with comments e Number of Messages Received This shows the number of messages that subscribers have received regardless of where the messages came from sub scriber non subscriber or system e Total Length of New and Saved Messages This is a combined total of the amount of time represented by the Number of New Messages and Number of Saved Messages fields e Number of Times 3 Bad Passwords Were En tered This counter increases each time a single call includes three attempts to enter a mailbox and the caller uses an incorrect mailbox password combina tion 13 21 OK When finished select the OK command button to exit Page 3 52 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE RRO RR COCO ED ORR OS H ll Eo aaea ise e tanta PROS PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 lus Telephone Voice Talk Blind Transfers Feature Codes Transfer Reconnect Message Lamp Message Lamp Cancel Call Initiation F TELEPHONE SYSTEM INTERFACE 13 22 This window appears when Telephone System Interface is highlighted and the Program co
213. mer the system will ignore the silence This timer applies to outgoing re mote notification calls only The range for this timer is 1 100 hundredth seconds The default is 15 hun dredths Minimum Ring Signal Off On These timers deter mine the minimum on and off times that are neces sary for the system to recognize a single incoming ring cycle The range for these timers is 1 100 tenths of a second 0 1 to 10 seconds The default for the Off timer is is 5 tenths 0 5 seconds The default for the On timer is 3 tenths 0 3 seconds This timer PROGRAMMING INTER TEL PRACTICES Issue 1 August 1994 IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE A AAA SS TD works in conjunction with the Number of Rings Be fore Answer field in Port Programming shown on page 3 26 Minimum Time Between Incoming Calls If a port is programmed to wait for more than one ring before answering see page 3 26 this timer tells the sys tem when to reset the internal ring counter and pre pare for the next call if a call was received that did not meet the minimum number of rings That is if the port is programmed to wait for four rings and only detects two rings during an incoming call at tempt it will not answer and the ring counter re mains at 2 This timer will tell the port how long to wait before resetting the timer back to 0 to prepare for the next incoming call The range for this timer is 1 100 tenths of a second 0 1 to 10 seconds The de fault is 80 te
214. mewhat If so make any necessary changes by following the actual in structions displayed on the monitor rather than Monitor and compatible monitor card Keyboard One set of applications software floppy disks these those outlined in the following steps disks are included with the IVX500 System 1 Install a customer provided monitor card in an available card slot on the PC motherboard On One set of MS DOS 6 2 floppy disks these disks some systems it may be necessary to temporari are included with the IVX500 System ly remove an existing Voice Processing Card 2 Connect a customer provided monitor to the ap A REPLACING THE HARD DISK DRIVE propriate connector on the bottom edge of the a f monitor card Then plug in the monitor s AC 7 3 Remove the existing hard disk drive and replace it power cord and turn on the monitor s AC power with the new hard disk drive as described in the steps switch below 3 Connect a customer provided keyboard to the 1 Save the existing IVX500 database on properly keyboard connector on the back of the PC formatted floppy disks For details refer to page 4 Plug in the PC s power cord and turn on the AC J70 0 PROGRAMMING power switch The monitor displays the system NOTE To save time and disk space you may memory check and then Hit lt DEL gt if you first want to have voice mail users delete all mes want to nin SETUP sages that do not need to be saved 5 Press t
215. mmand but ton is selected as shown on page 3 46 It allows you to program the telephone system information that will be used by the IVX500 System Refer to the APPLICA TION AND TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP section for further information regarding the specific telephone systems 13 23 SYSTEM TYPE Use the System Type drop down list box to select the type of telephone system by scrolling the highlight bar to the appropriate system name for your installation 13 24 VOICE TALK If the telephone system sup ports the Voice Talk feature select this check box to place a check mark in it To remove the check mark se lect it again Refer to page 4 3 in APPLICATION AND TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP for a discussion of Voice Computer Hunt Groups and Voice Talk 13 25 BLIND TRANSFERS If this flag is enabled the IVX500 will bang up immediately after dialing an extension number If disabled it will hold the line and listen for call progress tones or collect a Voice Talk re sponse To enable the flag select this check box to place a check mark in it To remove the check mark select it again 13 26 FEATURE CODES If any the feature codes shown in these text boxes do not match the feature codes that are programmed for the telephone system enter the correct code in the appropriate text box You can enter up to five digits including 0 9 F hookflash or P pause If your entry is invalid you will see a warning message and must enter a new code
216. n can be programmed to act as the message center for sf stations Then when an intercom caller calls a station that is busy or unavailable he or she can choose to leave a message at the called station s message center the Non Subscriber Voice Mail application The IVX500 is automatically called and the caller is connected directly to the station user s assigned mailbox The caller hears the station user s personal greeting 6 10 The message center designation also allows key set users to quickly and easily forward calls to their voice mailboxes To do this a station user presses the FWD key and then the MSG key Calls forwarded through the keyset are then sent to the station user s voice mailbox All station users can forward calls di rectly to the voice mail pilot number using one of the call forwarding feature codes However single line sets do not have MSG keys that can be used for forwarding to the message center 6 11 To use the message center features perform the following GMX 48 IMX 2448 database programming Station Data Specific Station Information DAA Program the desired stations to have the extension or pilot number of the Non Subscriber Voice Mail application as the message center Hunt Groups E e Program the circuits connected to the IVXS00 ports as hunt group members e Answer Yes to the prompt that asks Is This A Voice Mail Voice Computer Hunt Group CAMP ON
217. n help utility You may wish to refer to your Windows manual if you are unfamiliar with Help 5 4 The Help Utility window has a top banner as shown below and the selected text is shown in the lower portion of the screen The four commands along the top of the Help screen are used for access to the drop down menu topics as shown in the following table COMMAND DROP DOWN MENU OPTIONS File Open This allows you to open other files Print Topic This option prints the dis played topic Print Setup This allows you to set your printer parameters Exit Select this option to exit from the Help Utility Copy Use this option to copy the dis played topic to your Windows clip board Annotate This allows you to make notes about the Help topic and store them in the Help utility for later refer ence Define This allows you to place a bookmark on a Help topic so that you can return to it quickly You can also delete bookmarks using this menu List of Marks Existing bookmarks are listed and can be selected How to Use Help Select this option for complete instructions on using Help Always on Top Select this option to keep the Help window positioned in front of all others About Help This option displays licensing information INTER TEL PRACTICES PROGRAMMING IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 5 5 There are also six command buttons along the top
218. nergy and if not installed and used properly that is in strict accordance with the manufacturer s instructions may cause interference to radio and televi sion reception It has been type tested and found to com ply with the limits for a Class A computing device in accordance with the specifications in Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rule Operation of this board in a residential area may cause unacceptable interference to radio and TV reception requiring the operator to take whatever steps are necessary to correct the interference However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur ina particular installation If this board does cause interfer ence to radio or television reception which can be deter mined by turning the board off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient the receiving antenna Relocate the board with respect to the receiver Check that the board and receiver are not on the same circuit the board s system must be powered from an isolated dedicated AC outlet If necessary the user should consult the dealer or an ex perienced radio television technician for additional suggestions If RFI problems persist contact Inter Tel Customer Support The board is also registered with the Canadian Depart ment of Communications DOC If the board will be connected to Canadian lines contact the local telephone utility for any addit
219. ng by highlighting it use the up or down ar row key if necessary and pressing RETURN The Da tabase Programming Menu appears All programming can then be completed as described in this chapter D REMOTE PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM 6 10 A programmer can use modem access to the sys tem database for the purpose of customer programming or maintenance diagnostics from a location other than the customer site This allows the service personnel flexibility in making database changes without visiting the site and in system trouble situations the service per sonnel may perform preliminary investigations before going on site 6 11 The customer site must be equipped with an ex ternal auto answer modem connected to the IVX500 PC on COM2 6 12 To use the remote programming feature the user dials the telephone number that directly rings in to the modem is transferred to the modem or dials the modem extension number using DISA or a station When the modem circuit rings the auto answer modem will auto matically answer the call and generate modem tone The calling party may then connect the programming com puter s modem and proceed with the programming ses sion When the session is completed the calling party hangs up or disconnects the call from the modem When this happens the system modem will no longer hear mo dem tone and will disconnect 6 13 Toset upor check the modem parameters run the TVX500 System application and display the log
220. ng instructions After hearing the recording or while it is playing the caller may dial an extension or mailbox number e Automated Attendant Recall Destination If a call that is transferred by the automated attendant re calls it is sent to the Automated Attendant Recall Destination for the port that transferred the call The Recall Destination recording announces that the sta tion is unavailable and allows the caller to leave a voice mail message or dial another extension e Call Routing Announcements A Call Routing ap plication can be used as a playback device This is useful for programming hunt group announcement and overflow stations When accessed the Call Page 2 2 Routing Announcement application will play a re cording and then hang up Or the Call Routing An nouncement can be programmed to use Digit Translation a feature that allows one key access to extensions mailboxes applications etc Quick Message Retrieval Only one Quick Mes sage Retrieval application may be created for the system It is usually programmed as the alternate message source for the Non Subscriber Voice Mail ports Ifso when station users to respond to message indications left by the voice mail ports they are prompted only for their password Non Subscriber Voice Mail This application han dles all calls that are directed to voice mail other than Quick Message Retrieval placed by subscrib ers and non subscribers Callers will hear th
221. nsion number If the Extension ID has not been initialized calls can still be transferred to the associated extension number However they cannot be selected from the directory If the Extension ID s user name has not been recorded it cannot be heard when cal lers use the Automated Attendant Directory The name must be recorded in order to fully initialize the Exten sion ID See page 2 11 for more information on initial izing Extension IDs 2 13 Once the extension ID is initialized the exten sion user may access Extension ID Options which al lows the directory name and password to be modified 2 14 Ifan Extension ID has not been created for an ex tension Which is equipped on the telephone system cal lers using the automated attendant cannot be transferred to that destination Instead these callers will receive a system recording notifying them of an invalid entry and are routed back to the automated attendant s main menu 2 15 Individual extension IDs can be programmed as Private in database programming A Private number is included in the directory and can be dialed if the caller knows the number but the extension number informa tion is not available to the caller only the name is played 2 16 Extension IDs can also be programmed as Un listed That means that the number will not be included in the directory but can be dialed if the caller knows the extension number j Page 2 4 INTER TEL PRACTI
222. nt Enables directory and deter mines sort order Custom Recordings Programs descriptions Disk Usage Statistics Shows disk statistics Remote Notification Tables Programs description pager notification strings and outgoing access strings Subscriber Summary Statistics Shows statistics related to system wide mailbox operation Telephone System Interface Selects telephone sys tem type enables Voice Talk and programs fea ture codes used in telephone system Timers Programs system timers Voice Mail Information Determines system ad ministrator mailbox enables voice mail directory determines directory sort order and sets volume Report Programming REP sd Prints reports that show system programming System Maintenance SYS or MAINT Sets date and time day night dial 0 destination day mode parameters programming port and passwords Also used for save restore of database Page 3 16 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 9 APPLICATIONS PROGRAMMING 9 1 Applications Programming is used for assigning extension numbers and other parameters to applica tions Once the applications are programmed they may be used by the telephone system as system forwarding paths hunt group announcement overflow stations di rect ring in destinations message centers attendants or alternate message source destinations A program plan ning sheet
223. nths 8 seconds Notification No Answer Detection This esta blishes the number of rings required before the sys tem considers an attempt at remote messaging a no answer condition The range for this timer is 1 25 rings The default is 4 rings Number Called Busy This timer defines the amount of time the system will wait between outgo ing call attempts whenever a busy signal is encoun tered during a remote message notification attempt to a personal number The range for this timer is 1 255 minutes The default is 5 minutes Off Hook Delay This determines how long the sys tem should wait after coming off hook before play ing the first prompt The range for this timer is 0 5 seconds The default is 0 However the recom mended minimum setting is 1 second to allow a pause before the prompts are played thereby assur ing that no text it cut off Outgoing DTMF Digit Duration This is the length of the DTMF tones and inter digit pauses that are sent during remote notification to a pager or person al number The range for this timer is 30 250 milli seconds The default is 60 milliseconds NOTE If this timer is changed the PC must be reset to update the PC with the new timer value Pager Notification Retry This is the amount of time the system will wait between outgoing call at Page 3 56 tempts when the notification number is a pager The range for this timer is 1 255 minutes The default is 20 minutes Pause Vo
224. number Numbers are then assigned to specific applications 3 using the System Administrator s mailbox or through database programming 4 4 52 Any recording number 01 50 can be assigned Sy to any IVX500 System application In the default state Recording 01 is automatically defaulted to play the 5 system provided Voice Mail main greeting and Record ing 02 is reserved for the Automated Attendant main greeting The default recordings can be changed but will be returned to system provided values if the system 6 is defaulted A single recording may be used for multi ple applications 4 53 After making the required recordings the Sys tem Administrator must determine which ones play dur ing the telephone system s day and night modes of op eration This can be done from either the System Administrator s mailbox or through database program ming 4 54 The System Administrator must enter a valid two 7 digit recording number or a single digit followed by for recordings 1 9 before a custom recording can be made If a valid number has been entered and a previous recording exists the IVX500 System will play it This includes the two standard default greetings When no recording is associated with recording number the Sys tem Administrator will be prompted to create a record ing 4 55 Once the recording is installed it replaces any previous recording The only recordings that can be re trieved are system de
225. number can be used 9 4 Programmable application parameters include the following e Description The description for an application ap pears wherever the application is listed in the data base as well as in the system directory e Day night greetings Not used for automated atten dant recall and quick message retrieval applica tions When the application is called a Custom Recording made using the System Administrator s mailbox as described in FEATURES page 2 18 will play You can select any Custom Greeting Num ber for the Day and or Night Greeting The Day mes sage is played when the system is in day mode and the night message is played during night mode Re cording 01 by default contains the Voice Mail stan dard company greeting Recording 02 by default contains the system provided Auto Attendant com pany greeting e Digit translation Call Routing Announcement ap plications only Digit translation allows callers to dial a single digit to select a designated extension number mailbox the voice mail subscriber applica tion the operator the directory or hunt group pilot number Up to 12 digit translation storage locations 0 9 are available for each Call Routing An nouncement application NOTE Digit translation is not recommended when the application will be used as a hunt group announcement or overflow station on telephone systems in which the hunt group calls can be pulled away from the anno
226. numbers and the caller dials a num ber that does not have an associated mailbox on the TVX500 the number will be considered invalid even if a non associated mailbox with that number exists Miscellaneous System Wide Information win dow If mailboxes and extension IDs on the IVX500 are marked as associated and match the extension numbers in the telephone system enable the Validate Voice Mailboxes flag Page 4 15 APPLICATIONS amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE A o A eeeeeeee eeeEE A E D G CALL FORWARDING 4 19 Station users can select the call forwarding fea ture to send calls to the Non Subscriber Voice Mail ap plication When the forwarded call is received by the IVX500 the proper mailbox number is automatically dialed The caller hears the mailbox subscriber s per sonal greeting 4 20 When a call is forwarded to a Non Subscriber Voice Mail hunt group it may have to try more than one port before reaching one that is available If the number of day night rings field in the TVX500 database is changed to more than one ring the IVX500 will need enough time to search for an available port and allow the number of day night rings at the selected port before the Forward No Answer timer expires and the KSU re trieves that call Ensure that the following telephone system timer is set long enough to allow sufficient time for the
227. o remove all IDs use the None command button OK When the Extension IDs To Delete list appears as desired select the OK command button A win dow appears that tells you that you are about to de lete extension IDs for the selected devices and asks if you wish to continue Select Yes to continue or No to leave the IDs unchanged CANCEL To exit without changing the lists select the Cancel command button INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Windows Preferences Exit PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 Help Group Lists 11 GROUP LISTS 11 1 This window is used for programming Voice Mail group lists Group lists can be used by any Sub scriber for sending messages to several mailboxes simultaneously The parameters for programming group lists include the following e Group list description e Group list number e Mailboxes included in the list 11 2 A program planning sheet is located in Figure 3 6 on page 3 71 11 3 PROGRAM GROUP LIST To program the pa rameters for a group list highlight it in the Group Lists box and select the Program Group List command but ton A window appears as shown on the next page 11 4 CREATE GROUP LIST When the Create Group List command button is selected a window ap pears as shown on the next page Ifthe maximum number of group lists have already been programmed a warning shows you that You have already programmed the maximum number of group lists a
228. o screen shown on page 3 14 Then select the System Pro gramming drop down menu and choose the Modem Programming option from the menu A window appears as shown on the next page 6 14 To connect a remote programming session while the Inter Tel logo screen is displayed press F5 or press ALT S and then select Connect to Remote System from the pull down menu The window shown on page 3 12 is displayed You can then set the correct session information Page 3 10 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 Programming Modem Parameters 6 15 The window shown below is used for setting up the modem parameters It can be chosen by selecting Modem Programming from the System Programming drop down menu in the Inter Tel logo screen header Enter the necessary information as follows The default values are shown below Refer to the user manual for your modem to determine the necessary parameters 6 16 MODEM INITIALIZATION Enter the de sired command strings for initializing the modem for in coming and outgoing calls in the text boxes The current strings can be explained as follows Result codes sent Ok connect ring no carrier error or connect 1200 CODE mo CTN EN Use extended result codes Do not echo characters in command state Register 0 rings to answer 6 17 MODEM DIALING To determine the signals that will be sent before dialing enter the de
229. o select a command button do one of the fol lowing Mouse Place the mouse cursor on the desired com mand button and click the left button e TAB key Use the TAB key to advance to the com mand button and to highlight it Then press the SPACE BAR or RETURN to select it e ALT key Press the ALT key plus the underlined character In the sample above you would use ALT P to execute the Program command NOTE The OK and Cancel command buttons do not have underlined letters To quickly select Can cel you may press ESC For OK you may press ALT ENTER 4 15 Frequently a command button is highlighted by a dark border while you are programming in a window If so pressing the RETURN key will execute that com mand automatically You do not need to TAB to the but ton first Page 3 4 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 E OPTION BUTTON EXAMPLE lt gt Database amp Voice Prompts O System Prompts 4 16 Option buttons are used when there are two or more options for a feature and you can choose only one The options are shown in a list and the buttons are lo cated along the left Selecting the desired button places a dot in it to show which option was chosen 4 17 Option buttons can be selected using one of the following methods e Mouse Place the mouse cursor on the desired op tion button and click the left button e TAB key Use the TAB key to
230. ols which allow you to select and print reports and determine the directory sort order for manually generated reports eo The Automatic Report Generation section of the window contains controls for establishing the day and time the system should automatically print re ports enabling automatic report printouts clearing the system s statistics and a list of the reports to print along with the option to sort the Directory Listing re port 14 3 To perform the programming for these reports se lect Report Programming from the programming op tions menu A program planning sheet is located in Figure 3 9 on page 3 76 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 Print Time 12 00 pm Automatic Report Control Enable Automatic Reports Clear Statistics After Reports Print Automatic Report Selection Application and Port Statistics Directory Listing Reports Group List Report Directory Sort Order 14 4 OUTPUT DEVICE Select this drop down list box to specify the report s output device FILE or LPT1 14 5 FILE Used only if the output device is FILE Enter the name of the desired file in the File text box The system will validate that the specified drive output is defined but will not validate that the path exists on the system when this option is used Instead the database manager merely verifies that the file s syn tax is correct i e check for valid characters However it will not permit reports to b
231. omoooooooooooo Aa 4 29 9 Inter Tel AXXESS System oooooooooooomoroccomossosonoo eS 4 30 A Hardware Requirements cccsccccccccccccccccececs aa 4 30 B Analog Voice Mail Hunt Groups oooooooooooocoonoromsoso 4 30 C Message Waiting Notification oooooooooomoooororsorsorsorroso 4 31 D Message Center nicas wine a eede tases N 4 31 E Camp Om Tomes osc coos hig os 0b 95 bk Sees aia 4 31 F Validated Mailbox Numbers cccccsccccccccccccccccscsccecs 4 31 Gi Call Forward incida AA Shwe wes ees ees 4 32 H Outside Cals varia daa 4 32 I Setting The Date And Time ccccccccccccccccscscccscccccecs 4 32 Page 4 2 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE APPLICATION amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 a NN NN NN 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 This section gives basic setup instructions for each of the IVX500 application types Setup instructions are given for the following types of applications e Automated Attendant e Automated Attendant Recall Destination e Call Routing Announcement Quick Message Retrieval Non Subscriber Voice Mail 1 2 The FEATURES section give full descriptions of these applications and any applicable user procedures 1 3 This section also gives the hardware and program ming requirements necessary for installing the IVX500 on each of the Inter Tel and Premier systems shown in the Telephone System Interface programming window These instruct
232. on number to be notified when the mailbox receives a message Do not begin the number with 0 and do not include a trunk access code it will use the outgo ing access code programmed in the Remote Notification Table for the port see page 3 50 If you enter invalid characters you will see a warning message and you will have to enter a valid number 12 31 NOTIFICATION TYPE Determine whether the notification is a Personal Number that will be an swered by a person or Pager by selecting the Notifica tion Type drop down list box and scrolling the highlight bar to the desired option INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Notification Number Notification Stop Time _ 05 00pm Notification Category 12 32 NOTIFICATION CATEGORY Determine whether the notification number will be called when ever a new message is received or only when priority messages are received Select the Notification Category drop down list box and scroll the highlight bar to the de sired option 12 33 NOTIFICATION START and STOP TIME Enter the time of day that notifications will begin in the Notification Start Time text box Enter the time of day that notifications will end in the Notification Stop Time text box Use 12 hour format followed by am or pm or use 24 hour format For round the clock notification set the start and stop times to the same value 12 34 REMOTE NOTIFICATION TABLE The system can have up to 10 Remote
233. onnect Type Location Number Status 6 32 This window shows the information as it was programmed in the window on the previous page in cluding the COM port baud rate modem direct connec tion type site description and telephone number The Status line changes to indicate that the PC is configur ing the modem dialing waiting for a connection and setting up a connection 6 33 The command buttons allow the options of can celling the connection or redialing the number if prob lems arise the Skip button is used for Inter Tel engineering purposes only If the software is unable to communicate with the modem select the Cancel com mand button and check the connection between the mo dem and the PC Also verify that the modem is connected to the proper port To try again ae the Re dial command button 6 34 When the connection is completed the Inter Tel logo screen appears To begin the programming session press the F3 key Or press ALT P to view the System Programming pull down menu and then select Database Programming by highlighting it use the up or down ar row key if necessary and pressing RETURN The Da tabase Programming Menu appears 6 35 If the modem connection is lost during the pro gramming session allow a minute for the modem to re set then re establish the call using the procedure given above All changes that were saved by a system update before the connection was lost will be retained in
234. or address 3E0 DIP switches 1 and 2 must be in the ON closed position and switches 3 6 must be in the OFF open position c Check to make sure that jumper straps are in Stalled in the following locations on the AIC see Figure 1 6 on page 1 13 for orienta tion JUMPER PINS STRAP LOCATION J3 Over top two pins 1 and 2 J5 Over one pin only or no strap J6 Over one pin only or no strap d Holding the AIC near the PC Motherboard disconnect the two pin reset switch cable from the PC Motherboard and attach it to connector J1 on the AIC The other end of the cable should remain attached to the reset switch on the PC NOTE It may be necessary to unbundle the reset switch cable to allow it to reach the AIC e Attach one end of the two pin AIC to reset switch cable supplied with the PC to con nector J2 on the AIC Attach the other end of the cable to the PC Motherboard connector that was previously vacated in step 4d NOTE Be sure that pin 1 marked on each end of the cable matches pin 1 on the AIC and the PC Motherboard If connected incorrect ly the PC will be reset continuously f Insert the AIC in the appropriate PC slot and attach it to the chassis using the screw re moved in step 4a Make sure the card is securely attached to the PC Motherboard and does not touch any adjacent cards If not already installed install each of the up to four Voice Processing Cards VPCs as follows a Remove the b
235. ormation Miscellaneous Flags window En able the Transparent LCR flag for each of the cir cuits connected to IVX500 ports Station Programming Individual Station In formation Outgoing Access window Make sure the circuits connected to the VX500 ports that will be placing outgoing calls have outgoing access for the appropriate trunk groups Station Programming Individual Station In formation Toll Restriction window Make sure the circuits connected to 1VX500 ports that will be placing outgoing calls have the proper toll re strictions 4 24 The following information must be correctly programmed in the IVX500 database Miscellaneous Information window Remote Notification Tables When programming the Re mote Notification Tables do not use the LCR feature code for the Outgoing Access string un less the telephone system database has the IVX500 ports flagged for Transparent LCR Applications Programming Port Programming Port Configuration window Enable Remote Messaging Lamp Notification Enable any or all of the IVX500 ports for Remote Messaging Lamp Notification This allows them to turn on the message waiting indications at stations in the telephone system and to place outgoing calls 4 25 Ifthe customer wants calls to ring in directly to an application program the appropriate telephone sys tem trunks to ring in to the single line circuit extension number s or hunt group pilot number associated with
236. ory to look up the desired extension 2 3 When the automated attendant answers an outside call the caller will hear the company greeting followed by instructions and a the list of available options Inter com callers hear only the operating instructions and menu of options The caller then has the following op tions e Dial a station extension number If an extension number is dialed that has a mailbox or extension ID the call is transferred to that station e Dial a hunt group pilot number When a pilot number is dialed the call is transferred to the se lected hunt group The call rings or circulates ac cording to the hunt group s programmed distribution type all ring linear or distributed e Dial the Non Subscriber Voice Mail application s extension number The caller can reach the Voice Mail main greeting by dialing the extension number assigned to the Voice Mail application The Voice Mail application must also have an extension ID pro grammed for it The caller can then leave a message as a non subscriber or access any of the voice mail subscriber features See page 2 7 for Voice Mail information o Use the directory If the caller does not know the extension or mailbox number of the desired party he or she can spell the name using the keypad keys and look up the number in the directory This option can be disabled in the database Or if there are no names recorded for the individual mailboxes or for
237. ote Messaging is a subscriber feature that can be enabled through database programming A sub scriber with remote messaging can program specific telephone numbers for the voice mail system to call whenever new messages are received by the mailbox 4 17 Remote notification calls are placed to outside numbers by IVX500 ports that are programmed in the IVX database for remote messaging lamp notification The circuits connected to the ports must also be pro grammed in the telephone system database to have the necessary outgoing access and toll restrictions for the trunks 4 18 Each mailbox has a Primary and or an Alternate notification number The notification numbers are pro grammed to be accessed during specific days and times 4 19 The voice mail system monitors subscriber mail boxes continuously During its monitoring if new mes sages have been received or if the Pager Retry timer ex pired the system will check to see if the Primary notification number is turned on If it is the system will check the day and time programming If the current time is within the programmed notification day and time the voice mail system will make the notification call If the Primary Number is turned off or if the day or time does not match the voice mail system will immediately make the same check for the Alternate notification num ber 4 20 When the mailbox is being programmed for re mote notification message notification can be set to place
238. ou will see a warning window Select OK to continue and then select a valid extension number NOTE This is nof the extension number that telephone system users dial to reach the application They use the telephone system extension numbers or hunt group pilot numbers assigned to the single line circuits that are con nected to the IVX500 This is number applies only with in the IVX500 to identify the application It is also used in voice computer hunt group dial rules to select the ap plication see page 4 4 in APPLICATION amp TELE PHONE SYSTEM SETUP 9 14 APPLICATION TYPE Select the type of ap plication by selecting the desired option button A dot in the center of the option button indicates the selected ap plication Only one Quick Message Retrieval applica tion can be programmed per system Once it has been assigned that option button is dimmed and cannot be se lected 9 15 OK When the application has an extension number and an application type select the OK com mand button The programming window shown below appears Enter the information for the new application as described below 9 16 CANCEL To exit without creating the new ap plication select the Cancel command button Page 3 20 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 B PROGRAMMING AN APPLICATION 9 17 The window shown below appears when the Pro gram Application Command button is selected Pro
239. phone number that voice mail will send to the pagers as the callback number for all remote message noti fications sent to pagers The maximum length for this field is 18 digits e PAGER TERMINATION Enter the digit s up to 18 that must be dialed to terminate the dialing se quence for a pager At default it is 13 18 OUTGOING ACCESS STRINGS The maxi mum length these dials string is 18 digits e OUTGOING ACCESS This text box is used to identify the dial string used for selecting a trunk for placing remote notification calls The maximum length is 18 digits 0 9 P for pause or F for hookflash Make sure that the port has been pro grammed with outgoing access for the selected trunk group in the telephone system database e OUTGOING ACCESS TERMINATION This text box contains the dial string that the system uses to terminate an outgoing number The maximum length is 18 digits 0 9 or F for hookflash At default the setting is 13 19 OK CANCEL When finished select the OK command button Or to exit without saving any changes select the Cancel command button Page 3 51 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 Number of Mailboxes Number of New Messages Number of Saved Messages Average Mailbox Percent Full Number of Times Mailboxes Were More Than 80 Full Number of Times Mailboxes Were Full Number of Mailboxes Currently More Than 80 Full Number of Mailboxes Currently Full Number of Messag
240. phone system database a System Configuration The IDC circuits con nected to the IVX500 must be programmed as OPX circuits b Station Programming Individual Station Programming Special Purpose Station Programming window When programming each single line circuit that will be attached to the IVX500 designate the circuit as a voice mail station c Station Programming Individual Station Programming Miscellaneous Station Flags Programming window If required en able DC ringing d Hunt Group Programming window e Program the circuits connected to the IVX500 ports as hunt group members Enable the Voice Mail Hunt Group checkbox Page 4 13 APPLICATIONS amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 e Station Programming Individual Station Programming Miscellaneous Information window Assign the extension number or pi lot number associated with the Quick Mes sage Retrieval as the alternate message source for each of the IVX500 ports in the hunt group Without Voice Mail Computer Hunt Groups 4 9 The circuits connected to the IVX500 ports should be programmed into a hunt group type arrangement as described below instead of being placed in a regular hunt group NOTE Each hunt group should contain ports that are assigned to one type of application in the IVX500 data base For example a hunt group of Automated Atten dant ports a hunt group of Non Subscriber Voice Mail ports etc 1
241. pplications problem cannot be re solved Customer Support may instruct the installer on how to use the IVX500 diagnostics Page 1 3 SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE G OPTIONAL PRINTER 4 11 An optional customer provided parallel printer can be installed to print various reports H OPTIONAL MODEM 4 12 An optional customer provided external modem can be installed for remote database programming and maintenance diagnostics Refer to page 3 10 in PRO GRAMMING for additional information on remote sys tem access 5 PROGRAMING PC SPECIFICATIONS 5 1 In addition to the applications software the IVX500 System also includes database programming software that must be loaded on a customer provided PC for on site or stand alone remote programming 5 2 The programming PC requirements are e IBM compatible e 80286 or higher microprocessor 80386 recom mended o 5 megabytes MB available memory on the hard disk drive e 34 inch 1 44MB double sided high density flop py disk drive eo Windows 3 1 e MS DOS 3 3 or higher MS DOS 6 2 recom mended 1 MB available RAM 2 MB recommended e EGA or better graphics monitor VGA recom mended e COM port RS 232 C serial communications port e A programming mouse is optional but recom mended if a serial mouse is used install on an unassigned COM port 5 3 For remote database
242. programming and mainte nance diagnostics an internal or external modem is also needed See PROGRAMMING page 3 10 for addi tional information on remote system aceess i 5 4 To connect the customer provided programming PC to the IVX500 PC refer to page 3 10 in PRO GRAMMING Page 1 4 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION Issue 1 August 1994 6 IVX500 PC INSTALLATION 6 1 This section describes the recommended proce dures for installing the IVX500 System NOTICE This Inter Tel IVX500 Installation and Field Main tenance Manual instructs certified field technicians on the proper installation practices for the Inter Tel IVX500 System This manual does not provide step by step instructions for premises wiring practices as dictated by the National Electrical Code which in cludes but is not limited to cable layouts cable in stallation AC power installation proper AC grounding eliminating or preventing external inter ferences including but not limited to RFI EMI lightning AC power disturbances static discharge and other telephony practices standard within the in dustry Cable installers electricians and field tech nicians are expected to be properly trained and if applicable licensed in their trade practices Official Inter Tel IVX500 certification is required for tech nical assistance A PRE INSTALLATION CHECKLIST 6 2 To make installat
243. pure system tones Inter Tel tones are enabled on the telephone system See page 3 53 in PROGRAMMING Voice Talk If DTMF feedback tones will be enabled on the telephone system en able Voice Talk on the IVX500 by placing a check in the check box See page 3 53 the telephone system database following these guidelines a System Configuration window The IDC cir cuits connected to the IVX500 must be pro grammed as OPX circuits b Hunt Group Programming window Program the IDC circuits connected to the IVX500 ports as hunt group members For the Non Subscriber Voice Mail and Quick Message Retrieval applica tions Enable the Voice Computer Group checkbox Then program the dial rule string and recall destination refer to specific applications setup instructions in this chapter for dial rules For all other IVX500 application types Enabled the Automated Attendant Hunt NOTE ek INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE APPLICATION amp TELFPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 Group checkbox Then program the dial rule string and recall destination refer to specific applications setup instructions in this chapter for dial rules c Station Programming Individual Station Programming Special Purpose Station Programming window When programming each single line circuit that will be attached to the IVX500 designate the circuit as a voice mail station d Station
244. r cent of the installation that has been completed When prompted insert Database Programming Disks 2 and 3 in succession Each time select the OK command button to continue When the installation is complete the PC will display several messages regarding the installa tion Read each of these and then select OK to continue The setup will create an IVX500 System pro gramming group that contains the IVX500 Sys tem application If an IVX500 System programming group already existed the newly installed IVX500 System application will be added to that group and the upgrade icon To use the application you must have Program Manag er running Select the IVX500 System program ming group and then select the Database Programming application The Inter Tel logo screen displays and you may begin your pro gramming session PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 B ON SITE PROGRAMMING 6 5 For on site programming the PC is connected directly to the IVX500 System An RS 232 C cable from COM1 or COM2 on the programming PC is con nected to COM2 on the IVX500 PC See page 3 8 for a list of the programming PC s requirements 6 6 To connect a programming PC to the IVX500 PC follow these steps 1 Referring to the diagram below attach the DB25 modular adapter supplied with the database pro gramming cable kit to the DB25 COM2 serial port connector on the IVX500 PC 2 Attach the DB9 modular adapter supplied with the datab
245. r cord Turn off the monitor s AC power switch unplug the monitor and disconnect it from the monitor card 3 5 6 7 8 9 Page 1 22 Remove the monitor card from its slot on the PC motherboard If a VPC was removed to make room for the monitor card replace the VPC Disconnect the keyboard from the connector on the back of the PC replace the cover on the PC and re install the screws Insert Applications Software Disk 1 in the PC s floppy disk drive Plug in the PC s power cord and turn on the AC power switch Install the IVX500 applications software For details see page 1 17 Restore the saved database from step 1 on page 1 19 For details see page 3 67 in PROGRAM MING After the restore is complete and the system re sets check the database programming to ensure that the system database has been successfully restored A INTER TEL PRACTICES FEATURES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 FEATURES CONTENTS PAGE 1 Introduction o o Ada aan 2 2 2 Automated Attendant ad a aa 2 3 A Automated Attendant Applications oooooooooooooorooo is 23 B Automated Attendant Recall Destination oo oooo o o peas 2 4 C Automated Attendant Custom Recordings cccecccccceces 2 4 D ExtensionID P AEE E a 2 4 3 Call Routing Announcement Is E E 2 5 A Custom Recordings a A ees 2 5
246. r down arrow ke y to move the highlight bar e HOME END PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys You can use the HOME key to move directly to the top of the list or the END key to move directly to the bottom The PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys move up or down the list one screen at a time Page 3 3 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE o First letter or digit of desired item When a list is presented in alphabetical or numerical order you can quickly move to the first item beginning with a specific letter or number by entering that character For example for a list of timers by name you can move to timers that begin with D by pressing the D key You can then scroll through those entries by pressing the selected letter repeatedly That is each time you press the D key the highlight bar scrolls to the next entry that begins with D e Scroll bar When the list contains more items than can be shown in the list box there will be a scroll bar along the right edge of the list box It is made up of a band with an arrow at each end and a small box as shown in the List Box example The box shows the current position in the list The band is a scroll bar and it is used with the mouse cursor to move through the list Point the cursor at either of the ar rows and click the left button to move one line at a time or point the cursor at the box and hold down the left button Moving t
247. r proper operation Refer to the telephone system s installation manual for details 1 Ensure that the IVX500 PC s AC power switch is turned off and the AC power cord is unplugged 2 Ifthe Audio Interface Card AIC Voice Proces sing Cards VPCs and Serial Parallel Port Combination Card SPC are not already installed in the IVX500 PC proceed with the installation as outlined in the following steps If the AIC VPCs and SPC are already installed in the IVX500 PC skip to step 8 NOTE Instead of a separate Serial Parallel Port Combination Card some PCs may have a Disk Controller Combination Card that is equipped with serial and parallel ports 3 Remove the cover from the PC by removing the screws and sliding the cover off 4 If not already installed install the Audio Inter face Card AIC as follows refer to Figure 1 6 on page 1 13 5 NOTE The AIC should be installed in one the last slots on the PC Motherboard i e one of the slots furthest away from the PC s power supply This goal is to leave four 16 bit full size slots available for VPCs Refer to Figures 1 4 and 1 5 on pages 1 11 and 1 12 for sample card slot arrangements a Remove the bracket that covers the opening to one of the last slots in the PC i e one of the slots furthest away from the PC s power supply and set the bracket and screw aside Page 1 6 b Ensure that the AIC address selection DIP switches S1 are set f
248. racket that covers the opening to the appropriate 16 bit full size slot as shown in Figure 1 4 or 1 5 and set the bracket and screw aside b Depending on which number VPC 1 4 is being installed check to make sure that the address selection jumper straps are installed in the following locations on the VPC see Figures 1 7 and 1 8 for orientation INTER TEL PRACTICES TVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION Issue 1 August 1994 1STVPC 2NDVPC 3RDVPC 4TH VPC 300 HEX 308 HEX 310 HEX 318 HEX we we w2 we ee e_e e 8 e_e e_ e ee ee a_e e e gt o e_e ERE sash TE i o ee ee e ee ee c Insert the VPC in the appropriate slot and if possible attach it to the chassis using the screw removed in step 5a Make sure the card is securely attached to the PC Motherboard and does not touch any adjacent cards 6 Ifnot already installed install the Serial Parallel 7 8 Port Combination Card SPC as outlined below refer to Figure 1 9 on page 1 16 for a sample card NOTE Instead of a separate Serial Parallel Port Combination Card some PCs may have a Disk Controller Combination Card that is equipped with serial and parallel ports a Remove the brackets that cover the openings to two available 8 bit half size slots and set the brackets and screws aside b Referring to the manufacturer s user manual check to make sure that any jumper s
249. rcuits connected to IVX500 ports as hunt group members e Enable the Voice Mail Hunt Group check box E CAMP ON TONES 4 15 When callers hear busy signals when calling the IVX500 they can simply wait off hook camp on until the called port is available To prevent the camp on tones from being sent to the IVX500 perform the fol lowing database programming Station Programming Individual Station In formation Miscellaneous Flags window Dis able camp on tones for all circuits connected to IVX500 ports 4 16 When the IVX500 places a call to a busy station it must be able to recognize the busy signal If you are not using Voice Talk the camp on timer must be ad justed to allow the IVX500 to recognize busy signal when placing a call System Wide Features Timers window Change the Camp On timer to 10 seconds de fault is 3 seconds F VALIDATED MAILBOX NUMBERS 4 17 This feature affects calls transferred to voice mail or placed through an automated attendant on the IVX500 If all mailbox numbers and extension IDs match extension numbers are associated the Vali date Voice Mailbox Numbers option should be enabled to allow the system to check that the number entered by the caller is valid If there are mailbox numbers that do not match an extension number non associated there is no need to validate and this option should be disabled 4 18 If the telephone system is programmed to vali date voice mailbox
250. rding 4 27 camp on tones 4 26 hunt groups 4 25 message center 4 26 message waiting notification 4 26 outside calls 4 27 4 32 STN B2 board 4 25 validated voice mailbox numbers 4 27 GMX 48 system 4 21 APM 4 21 4 22 call forwarding 4 24 camp on tones 4 23 hunt groups 4 21 message center 4 23 message waiting notification 4 23 outside calls 4 24 validated voice mailbox numbers 4 24 with voice computer hunt groups 4 21 Greetings 3 17 3 21 L mailbox 2 14 3 39 3 44 Group lists 2 8 2 17 capacities 1 2 programming 3 31 report 3 58 3 62 sending messages 2 13 Page 1 2 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE INDEX Issue 1 August 1994 A aan ANNAN NN rr H Hard disk replacement 1 19 Help utility 3 6 Hookflash duration timer 3 55 Hourglass cursor 3 5 Hunt groups 256 832 port systems 4 12 ESP system 4 17 GLX Plus system 4 29 GMX 152D system 4 25 IMX 1224 2460 system 4 17 voice computer 4 3 IMX 1224 2460 system 4 17 call forwarding 4 20 camp on tones 4 19 hunt groups 4 17 message center 4 19 message waiting notification 4 19 outside calls 4 20 single line circuits 4 17 validated voice mailbox numbers 4 19 without voice computer hunt groups 4 18 IMX 2448 system 4 21 APM 4 21 4 22 call forwarding 4 24 camp on tones 4 23 hunt groups 4 21 message center 4 23 message waiting notification 4 23 outside calls 4 24
251. re that you have enough diskettes for saving the data check the Disk Usage Statistics report as shown on page 3 49 to determine the number of minutes used for the prompts and messages Each dis kette will hold 5 6 minutes of prompts or messages To calculate the number of diskettes needed divide the number of minutes used shown in the statistics by 5 15 25 OPTIONS Determine which information you want to save or restore Database amp Voice Data or Sys tem Prompts Selecting the desired option places a dot in the option button The data included in the options are as follows Database The system The system amp Voice database as well as database and Prompts all custom custom recordings recordings and and messages messages will be contained on the saved to the selected drive will selected drive overwrite the current database and prompts if any The customer recorded prompts contained on the disk in the selected drive will overwrite the current prompts if any The current customer recorded prompts will be saved to the selected drive PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 paren ce ene RA Ses ESA PRA TRA ER Sees cease eee ee Bae oo soe o ee ee o rarer Mees ee hace 15 26 DRIVE Determine which drive on the IVX500 PC not the programming PC will be the save destina tion or restore source Selecting the desired drive places a dot in
252. roups If desired change the Number of Rings Before Answer field The Remote Mes saging Lamp Notification option should also be enabled 6 7 8 9 Page 4 8 Systems without Voice Computer Hunt Groups If desired program one or more single line circuits connected to IVX500 Call Routing Announcement ports as members of a hunt group in the telephone system Systems with Voice Computer Hunt Groups If the telephone system has voice computer hunt group capabilities the single line circuits con nected to the IVX500 ports can be placed in a voice computer hunt group that uses dial rules Follow the instructions for your specific tele phone system located in this chapter For addi tional information regarding dial rules also refer to page 4 4 When programming the dial rules for the voice computer hunt group use the fol lowing format XXX 1 In place of the XXX use the number that is pro grammed for the Call Routing Announcement application in the IVX500 System in step 1 not the telephone system extension number of the single line circuit connected to the ports If the customer wants calls to ring in directly to the Call Routing Announcement application program the appropriate telephone system trunks to ring in to the single line circuit exten sion number s or hunt group pilot number associated with the application Using the Voice Mail System Administrator s mailbox record the greetin
253. rrnncororaronrcnaconas 3 5 E Check Box iii ANA 3 5 G Items That Cannot Be Selected Dimmed Items ooooooo o o 3 5 H Hourglass Symbol Cursor oooooooonmorosoonosorsmsossssss 3 5 I Managing Multiple Windows oooooooocooormpoosscosossso 3 5 5 Using The Help Utility ooooooooonorororcorcorosrsorosossos 3 6 6 System Set Up For Programming ooooooooococncoccocrossssososso 3 8 A Installing The Programming Software ooooooooooocmomoooosoo 3 9 B On Site Programming As a aaa 3 10 C Stand Alone Programming ooooomoomomsoroomoo A 3 10 D Remote Programming Via Modem o oooooooooocooconccoscooso 3 10 E Password naci n AAA RA 3 13 7 Inter Tel Logo Window ooooooooonorororcrrcrrssrrnnsrororooso 3 14 8 Database Programming Menu Window o ooooooooocmcorcnoocoscos 3 15 A Window Header Commands scccecccccccccccccccccscccens 3 15 B Access To Programming Areas oooooooooooocmsorscrroscrsscas 3 15 9 Applications Programming ooooooooooooooconcrccrsarcrrorsons 3 17 A Creating Applications o ooooooooooomoncrscsrcrrososcoso 3 20 B Programming An Application ooooooooororocncocsososss 3 21 C Deleting Applications ooooooccooncroncsccrrnrsssosssso 3 24 D Port Programming A es a oe 3 25 10 Extension ID Programming oooooooooonoccrcrrrcsosossosso 3 27 A Programming An Extension ID
254. s Page 3 35 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 A CREATING OR CHANGING A MAILBOX NUMBER 12 7 The following window appears when the Create Mailbox or Change Mailbox Number command button is selected To create a new mailbox or to change the number of an existing mailbox use the following proce dure Anas SSD a RE ON persian eas Mailbox Number f 12 8 MAILBOX NUMBER Enter the desired mail box number in the text box 12 9 OK When finished select OK Selecting OK af ter creating a mailbox automatically displays the win dow shown on page 3 41 e Ifyou entered an invalid number or a number that is already assigned you will see a warning window Select OK to continue and then select a valid num ber 12 10 CANCEL To exit without creating a mailbox select the Cancel command button B BATCH CREATION OF MAILBOXES 12 11 The following window appears when the Batch Create Mailboxes command button is selected To de termine the stations and hunt groups that will have mail boxes created for them use the following procedures INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE RATO TAO RAS eet Of ate RA RARA RARA o a PRI AO ESAS IA ARRE 12 12 ENTER RANGE To create mailboxes for one or more stations or hunt groups enter a single extension number or a range of extension numbers When entering a range enter the lower extension number a dash and then the higher extension number
255. s ination 2 8 If an invalid number is dialed the caller is prompted to enter another number 2 9 Tocreate an Automated Attendant Recall Destina tion application follow the instructions on page 4 6 in the APPLICATION AND TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP section C AUTOMATED ATTENDANT CUSTOM RECORDINGS 2 10 Custom recordings are made using the System Administrator s mailbox as described on page 2 18 Each recording is associated with a recording number and assigned to the application s in database program ming or using the System Administrator s mailbox Re fer to page 2 19 in this section and pages 3 21 and 3 48 in PROGRAMMING D EXTENSION ID 2 11 Extension IDs are used for transferring calls through the Automated Attendant or using the Auto mated Attendant Directory An extension ID allows callers to be transferred to extension numbers stations hunt groups and applications that do not have mail boxes It also allows the extension number to have a re corded name in the directory This feature is set up and initialized using database programming and Voice Mail features 2 12 If an Extension ID has been created in database programming for a telephone system extension number either the principal user of the extension number or the System Administrator must set up initialize the ID with a password and record a name for use in the Exten sion Directory At default the extension ID password is the same as the exte
256. s If you selected indi vidual days you will be prompted to press digits 1 7 which correspond to the days Sunday through Saturday Your select will be played back tells you what your current remote messaging 7 The options prompt returns Either select another status is If desired press to return to the Per sonal Options Menu Page 2 15 option as described above or press 4 to save the settings and exit FEATURES Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE F NON SUBSCRIBER USE OF VOICE MAIL 4 41 Callers who do not have a subscriber mailbox can leave messages for subscribers Also Subscribers can use this method for leaving messages without accessing their mailboxes If a non subscriber message is left using a station with an associated mailbox the receiving mailbox Subscriber can reply to the message if desired and the reply will be sent to the caller s associated mail box 4 42 Non subscribers can gain access to the voice mail system through the automated attendant by dial ing the Voice Mail application extension number through a call transfer by placing an intercom call to the Voice Mail application extension number or by being forwarded to voice mail Leaving A Message 4 43 TO LEAVE A MESSAGE AS A NON SUBSCRIBER 1 Ifyou hear the voice mail greeting or menu dial the desired mailbox number If you do not know the number you can press pound to
257. s the conflicts are displayed You can choose to abort the process and return to the Enter Range text box by selecting the Abort Batch Create command button in the waming window Or you can choose to override the conflicts and change the existing numbers into new extension IDs by select ing the Ignore Conflicts command button NOTE This warning will not appear if any of the selected extension ID numbers correspond to application ex tension numbers Applications can have associated extension IDs 10 14 CANCEL To exit from this window without creating any new extension IDs select the Cancel com mand button Page 3 29 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 A cazas es eee A Bee ee R ae re EE a go AARSE RRE oe E 57 TT dE o ee oes ee Bos O oF eS secrete EC Sena es AS E ISSUER ER C DELETING EXTENSION IDS 10 15 The window shown above appears when the Delete Extension IDs command button is selected To determine the extension IDs to be deleted use the fol o lowing procedure e ADD ALL Use the Add command button to move the highlighted extension ID from the Pick List to the Extension IDs To Delete list or use the All com mand button to place all IDs in the list e REMOVE NONE To remove an ID from the Ex o tension IDs To Delete List highlight it and select the Page 3 30 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Bs AA pS Se se AR S ee ee ee see Remove command button Or t
258. s from making new recordings and causing database errors Page 3 67 PROGRAMMING INTER TEL PRACTICES Issue 1 August 1994 IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FIGURE 3 4 APPLICATION AND PORT PROGRAMMING APP OR PORT APPLICATIONS Duplicate and fill in this form for each Application FIELD INFORMATION Digit Translation Enter action and if applicable destination The Actions that can be selected for digits and 0 9 and for Timeout are Transfer To Operator Company Directory First Name Company Directory Last Name Subscriber Access Invalid Transfer To Extension Transfer To Mailbox Transfer To Collected Extension Hang Up Timeout Timer value sec Page 3 68 INTER TEL PRACTICES PROGRAMMING 1VX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 FIGURE 3 4 APPLICATION AND PORT PROGRAMMING Continued PORTS Duplicate and fill in this form for each Port FIELD INFORMATION meme Number of Rings Before Answer Day Mode Number of Rings Before Answer Night Mode Page 3 69 PROGRAMMING INTER TEL PRACTICES Issue 1 August 1994 IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE a ee ct FIGURE 3 5 EXTENSION ID PROGRAMMING EXT OR EXTID TO USE Make sufficient copies of this page and fill in information for each extension ID DESCRIPTION UNLISTED PRIVATE PASSWORD Page 3 70 INTER TEL PRACTICES PROGRAMMING IVX500 INSTA
259. s when the Clear Mailbox Messages command button is selected To determine the mailboxes that will have their mes sages erased use the following procedure e ADD ALL Use the Add command button to move O the highlighted mailbox from the Pick List to the Mailboxes To Clear list oruse the All command but ton to place all mailboxes in the list Page 3 38 OEA eae SO R te A ARA PRT E INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE REMOVE NONE To remove a mailbox from the Mailboxes To Clear list highlight it and select the Remove command button Or to remove all mail boxes use the None command button OK CANCEL When the Mailboxes to Clear list box appears as desired select the OK command but ton Or to exit without changing the lists select the Cancel command button INTER TEL PRACTICES 1VX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 E PROGRAMMING A MAILBOX 12 17 The window shown on page 3 41 appears when the Program command button is selected To program the parameters for a mailbox use the following proce dures 12 18 The programming window can be used for pro gramming the following parameters for each mailbox Description Each mailbox can have a description of up to 20 characters The description is used for providing first and last names for the mailbox direc tory For correct directory operation enter the last name followed by a comma and the first name Do
260. set it to Automated Attendant Recall Des tination if the telephone system does not have voice computer hunt groups If desired change the Number of Rings Before Answer field The Remote Messaging Lamp Notification option should also be enabled 4 5 Page 4 6 For stations to receive calls through the Auto mated Attendant Recall Destination application they must have a mailbox or extension ID pro grammed to match their telephone system exten sion number See page 3 35 for mailbox pro gramming instructions and page 3 27 for extension ID programming instructions Systems without Voice Computer Hunt Groups If desired program one or more single line circuits connected to IVX500 Automated Attendant Recall Destination ports as members of a hunt group in the telephone system Systems with Voice Computer Hunt Groups If the telephone system has voice computer hunt group capabilities the single line circuits con nected to the TVX500 ports can be placed in a voice computer hunt group that uses dial rules Follow the instructions for your specific tele phone system located in this chapter For addi tional information regarding dial rules also refer to page 4 4 When programming the dial rules for the voice computer hunt group the following format HI 15 R 1 SgS In place of the XXX use the number that is pro grammed for the Automated Attendant Recall Destination application in the IVX500 System in
261. sired in formation in the Prefix text box To determine the after dialing signals enter the information in the Suffix text box Modem Initialization Incoming Qutgoing ATQOHOX1EOSO 0 Modem Dialing Prefix Suffix _ Lock DTE Baud Rate _ Use DTR to Hang Up Modem ATQOHOX1E0SO 0 ATDT 6 18 LOCK DTE BAUD RATE This option is used for high speed modems only The DTE baud rate con trols the communication between the CO line and the modem Locking the DTE baud rate keeps the CO to modem rate the same while allowing the PC to modem baud rate to be adjusted To lock the DTE baud rate se lect the check box to place a check mark in it To remove the check mark select the box again 6 19 USE DTR TO HANG UP MODEM If this op tion is enabled the DTR signal is dropped for 0 5 se conds when the programmer disconnects the remote modem connection by pressing F6 or pressing ALT S and then selecting Disconnect From Remote System from the pull down menu This hangs up the modem on the programming PC not the system modem It should be used only if the modem is having trouble disconnect ing from the call and only on modems that are designed to disconnect in this manner 6 20 MODEMRESPONSES To determine the mes sages that will appear when the modem makes a connec tion or reaches a busy number enter the desired text in the appropriate boxes 6 21 DEFAULT To return all values to default as shown below select the De
262. ss number You hear the recorded system greeting or main menu 2 Press to access the Directory Services application 3 Use the keys on your telephone to enter the de sired name then press If you wish to exit from the directory without selecting a name press or hang up 4 The Voice Mail application will play the selected name Do one of the following To accept the name press 4 To hear the previous name in the directory press To hear additional information for the selected name if allowed press 2 To hear the next name in the directory press 3 To spell a different name press 4 and repeat step 3 To switch the first last name sort order press s Page 2 21 INTER TEL PRACTICES PROGRAMMING IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 PROGRAMMING CONTENTS PAGE 1 Introduction cssisin ciia aT aera rei rear rr eee ee eee eee ee oe 3 2 2 Plan The Programming Session oooooooooooosomoosonnsossoss 3 2 3 Microsoft Windows ooooooooomonrroooosooos EA 3 2 4 How To Use The Programming Windows o oooooooocoomoooooo 3 3 A Text Box LPOLOLODLOALIe LS a on 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0n u 0 0 0 lt cr o 6 6 0 0 0000 3 3 Bc List BOS iu A RIO A TO ess 3 3 C Drop Down List Box oooooooooorocorooscrrrcrronancrsso 3 4 D Command Button A eee eG eee aes 3 4 E Option Button oo oooocooncrcccr
263. ssaging Lamp Noti fication This allows them to turn on the message waiting indications at stations in the telephone system and to place outgo ing calls b Miscellaneous Information Telephone System Interface window o System Type Select the AXXESS system type e Codes For Message Lamp use the Silent Message feature code 367 Set the Call Initiation and Transfer codes to P e Voice Talk The AXXESS System does not support Voice Talk 2 To program the single line circuits and hunt groups that will be used by the IVX500 refer to the following programming areas a Service Premium Feature Selection win dow Enable the Analog Voice Mail Hunt Groups premium feature This requires 5 units b System Wide Features Hunt Group Pro gramming window e Program the circuits connected to the IVX500 ports as hunt group members Enable the Analog Voice Mail Hunt Group flag by placing a check in the check box c Station Programming Individual Station Programming Miscellaneous Flags win dow Make sure that the Different Alerting Cadences and Different Ringback Cadence flags are enabled this is the default state for these flags d Station Programming Individual Station Programming Miscellaneous Information window Assign the Quick Message Retriev al port s extension number as the alternate message source for each of the VX500 ports in the hunt group Page 4 30 INTER TEL PRACTICES
264. ssigned to another ap plication 2 When the application programming window shown on page 3 21 appears enter a description for the application and select recording numbers for day and night modes The recordings will be 6 made in step 6 Recording descriptions are pro grammed as shown on page 3 48 Do not pro gram any digit translation information 3 Program the IVX500 ports as described on page 3 25 Set the Port Operation field to Voice Computer Hunt Group if the telephone system will be programmed to send voice computer dial 7 rules set it to Call Routing Announcement if the telephone system does not have voice com puter hunt groups If desired change the Number Page 4 7 of Rings Before Answer field The Remote Mes saging Lamp Notification option should also be enabled Systems without Voice Computer Hunt Groups If desired program one or more single line circuits connected to TVX500 Call Routing Announcement ports as members of a hunt group in the telephone system Systems with Voice Computer Hunt Groups If the telephone system has voice computer hunt group capabilities the single line circuits con nected to the IVX500 ports can be placed in a voice computer hunt group that uses dial rules Follow the instructions for your specific tele phone system located in this chapter For addi tional information regarding dial rules also refer to page 4 4 When programming the dial rules for th
265. stem can be used with the follow ing Inter Tel Integrated Systems Inc telephone sys tems IMX 2448 IMX 1224 2460 IMX 256 IMX 416 832 GMX 48 GMX 152D GMX 256 GMX 416 832 GLX Plus AXXESS 1 3 The IVX500 System can also be used with the fol lowing Premier Telecom Products Inc systems e ESP eo ESPMDX e ESPDX 1 4 The IVX500 System can have up to sixteen ports with each port requiring its own dedicated single line circuit 2 INSTALLATION AND PROGRAMMING OUTLINE 2 1 IVX500 System installation and programming is performed in the following order Detailed instructions and diagrams are located throughout the rest of the manual 1 Review the hardware requirements in the AP PLICATION TELEPHONE SYSTEM SET UP section for the specific telephone system that will be connected to the IVX500 System 2 Connect the IVX500 PC to the telephone system as outlined in this section of the manual 3 Review the FEATURES section to determine the specific applications that will be used e g auto mated attendant voice mail etc 4 Program the telephone system to use the desired applications as outlined in the APPLICATION amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP section e g single line port setup hunt group programming message waiting notification etc 5 Configure and program the IVX500 System as outlined in the PROGRAMMING section e g applications and mailbox programming etc 6 Check each applic
266. stem forwarding point the mailbox number that is dialed when the IVX500 an swers is the original destination station s extension number See the system forwarding description in the Installation amp Field Maintenance Manual for your tele phone system For example The principal station is called the call is sent to the first forwarding point and then is sent to a IVX500 application where the principal station s extension number is dialed The following programming must be completed in the 1VX500 database a Applications Programming window e Applications Programming Create the necessary IVX500 applications using the application setup instructions in this chapter e e Port Programming Port Configura tion Select the appropriate application type Automated Attendant Call Routing Announcement etc for the Port Opera tion of each 1VX500 port Enable Remote Messaging Lamp Notifi cation Enable any or all of the IVX500 ports for turning on the message waiting indications at stations in the telephone system b Miscellaneous Information Telephone System Interface window System Type Se lect the appropriate system type Note that there are two options for each of the 256 and 416 832 port systems depending on whether standard or pure system tones Inter Tel tones are enabled on the telephone system See page 3 53 in PROGRAMMING The following programming must be completed in the tele
267. t Windows gives a standard look and feel to Database Programming and all other Windows applications 3 2 The Database Programming package contains all the software necessary to run Database Programming You must run Database Programming under Microsoft Windows version 3 1 or higher 3 3 With Microsoft Windows you can take advantage of these additional features of the Windows environ ment e Running multiple applications You can run sever al applications under Windows at one time and easily switch between them creating an integrated work environment e Data exchange between applications You can transfer data between Database Programming and other standard DOS applications as well as other Windows applications e Windows control of the DOS environment From the Windows environment you have easy access to all Windows and non Windows applications files directories and disks and control all DOS related tasks such as directory or file management and for matting disks 3 4 To run Database Programming with other applica tions under Microsoft Windows you need to license and install Microsoft Windows version 3 1 or higher Page 3 2 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 4 HOW TO USE THE PROGRAMMING WINDOWS 4 1 The database is divided up into windows that permit the programmer to view and change the system programming one section at a time Each of the pro
268. t changing the information select Cancel Page 3 28 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 o OP fp we B CREATING EXTENSION IDS 10 11 The window shown above appears when the Create Extension IDs command button is selected To determine the stations that will have assigned extension IDs use the following procedure 10 12 ENTER RANGE To create extension IDs for one or more stations enter a single extension number or a range of extension numbers When entering a range enter the lower extension number a dash and then the higher extension number as shown above Extension numbers can have 1 3 digits but cannot begin with 0 10 13 OK When you have entered the desired range select the OK command button to return to the Exten sion ID Programming window If the selected range is valid a window will appear that asks you to confirm your request to create extension ID Select Yes to contin ue or No to exit without creating the IDs If the selected range is invalid or conflicts with other extensions you will see one of the following messages 2 7 bs SD ie ee Ee pe IAS GASTA EES If you enter an invalid extension number you will see a warning message explaining the conflict Se lect the OK command button in the warning window to continue Ifthe range you entered includes numbers that were previously assigned to extension IDs mailboxes or group list
269. te that matches the RS232 port INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE RR TOE PELLET SELLE LLL TEC LET EL LS ELLIE ESSE LAA atte chee ean Gu RRA ROSSANA teeters ONSET LE TED ARRE AAA 7 INS PEGAS TEIDE EAS RR RRR e ENTRA AS Ca i ADT A ON CRIAS IE asar L L SS DES 6 27 LOCATION For a modem connection enter a name for the remote modem site in the Description text box 6 28 PHONE For a modem connection enter the telephone number of the remote modem site in the Phone text box Special characters can be included in the number if they are accepted by the modem Refer to the user manual for your modem to determine the neces sary Characters 6 29 SAVE When the information appears as desired select the Save command button This replaces the de fault values with the new information so that you do not have to repeat this procedure each time you call this cus tomer 6 30 CANCEL To exit without connecting a pro gramming session select the Cancel command button 6 31 CONNECT When the session information is correct begin the programming session by selecting the Connect command button A window appears as shown on the next page The session information is automati cally saved when you select Connect Page 3 12 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 Suigoing Session ester Perens EEE ae ee ee ae ees Comm Port Baud Rate C
270. ted in Figure 3 10 on page 3 77 15 22 PASSWORDS Choose the password to be pro grammed by highlighting the desired line in the Pass word list box and then selecting the Program command button The following window will appear Enter the old password If the password is correct the window header then changes to Enter New Password Enter the new password as described below RRS ae gos 7 ines Lo os ted es eo PASSWORD Enter the password of up to 8 charac ters The characters will not appear on the screen when typed The system is not case sensitive you may use upper or lower case characters To remove an existing password simply move the cursor to the text box and without pressing any additional keys press RETURN OK After typing the password select the OK com mand button The window heading will change to Verify New Password and you must retype the password as before If the entered passwords match you will return to the Password window if not you must re enter the new password and verify it again e CANCEL If you make a mistake while entering the password or wish to leave it unchanged select the Cancel command button Page 3 66 por INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Database amp Voice Data System Prompts D SAVE AND RESTORE 15 23 This window appears when you select the Save Restore command button shown on the preceding page 15 24 To ensu
271. tered The Actions that can be selected for the digits 0 9 and for the Timeout option are e Transfer To Operator This action transfers the call to the Dial 0 Destination that is programmed in the System Maintenance window shown on page 3 63 e Company Directory First Name This sends the caller to the directory prompt that asks the caller to enter the first name of the desired party e Company Directory Last Name This sends the caller to the directory prompt that asks the caller to enter the last name of the desired party o Subscriber Access This sends the caller to the mail box prompt that requests a mailbox number e Invalid The digit will not be used Callers who press this digit hear a recording that tells them that it is in valid eo Transfer To Extension This action sends the call to the designated extension station hunt group or ap plication SRR a RRR ads OPALAR ARAA gk SRT RA REAR Soe EEE reddidi EEE ETT erga leet Name E q Transfer To Operator de Subscriber Access Transfer To Collected Extension Transfer To Mailbox XXX Transfer To Extension XXX e Transfer To Mailbox This sends the call to the desig nated mailbox This will not appear if there are no programmed mailboxes e Transfer To Collected Extension To allow callers to dial extension numbers of stations and hunt groups that have a mailbox or extension ID use this Action for digits that correspond to the first digits of
272. the Quick Message Retrieval application by leaving a message in a mailbox When the station user Subscriber associated with the mailbox re sponds to the message the call should be sent to the Quick Message Retrieval application The application should access the correct mailbox and request the Subscriber s password APPLICATIONS amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE E NON SUBSCRIBER VOICE MAIL 3 8 This application handles all non subscriber calls that are directed to voice mail Callers will hear the main company greeting followed by a menu of available op tions In telephone systems with voice computer hunt groups internal callers will hear only the menu of op tions and not the company greeting Stations can for ward or transfer calls directly to their mailbox using this application s extension number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Create the application using the programming window shown on page 3 19 Enter the desired extension number for the application do not use a number that is assigned to another application When the application programming window shown on page 3 21 appears enter a description for the application Also select recording num bers for day and night modes if custom record ings will be used The recordings will be made in step 10 Recording descriptions are pro grammed as shown on page 3 48 T
273. the application Trunk Groups DID Groups and Ring In Answer Patterns Ring In Answer Patterns window Make sure the circuits connected to IVX500 ports that will be receiving outside calls are pro grammed for ring in for the appropriate trunk groups I SETTING THE DATE AND TIME 4 26 To ensure that the correct time is used by the IVX500 the following information is programmed in the IVX500 database System Maintenance window shown on page 3 63 in PROGRAMMING System Maintenance window Enter current date and time or set it to match the programming PC Page 4 16 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE APPLICATION amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 5 INTER TEL IMX 1224 2460 AND PREMIER ESP SYSTEMS 5 1 In order for the IVX500 to work properly with the Premier ESP and Inter Tel IMX 1224 2460 Systems the following installation and programming procedures must be performed A HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS 5 2 When connecting the IVX500 to IMX 1224 2460 or ESP single line circuits do not include the second pair 30VDC and ground from the single line circuits The 30VDC from the single line circuits will damage the IVX500 5 3 The single line circuits can be configured for AC or DC ringing depending on the IVX500 PC configura tion Refer to the telephone system manual for complete installation instructions and requirements B HUNT GROUP PROGRAMMING 5 4 This section contains th
274. the notification call for each new message or only when priority messages are received This defaults to each new message 4 21 Remote Message Notification can also be pro grammed to retry the call periodically when it encoun ters a busy trunk or trunk group If the system is not able to place the call within the parameters of the pro grammed notification day and time due to busy facili ties or invalid programming the mailbox will receive a message stating that the notification could not be com pleted the mailbox owner will hear the message next time he or she accesses the mailbox 4 22 Ifthe mailbox user accesses the mailbox between the time the message is received and when remote noti fication is successful the remote notification will be canceled It is assumed that the mailbox user listened to the message when the mailbox was accessed However when the Pager Retry timer expires the remote notifica tion call will be placed again if the user did not take ac tion on the message and or another message was re ceived 4 23 The programmed notification number can be an extension number or an outside telephone number When an outside telephone number is used the system will access an outgoing trunk using a remote notifica tion table that contains a pre programmed trunk access code and will be followed by a programmed access ter mination feature code if needed If the notification number is associated with a pager
275. the option button Be sure to place a diskette in the correct drive on the IVX500 PC before selecting the Save or Restore command button 15 27 SAVE or RESTORE Determine the operation you wish to perform and select the appropriate com mand button The following windows appear e Each operation begins with a window that asks if you are sure you Wish to continue Select Yes or No A restore operation will read from the specified drive on the IVX500 PC a save operation will save in formation to the disk in that drive e When asave operation is completed a window asks if you wish to perform another operation If you an swer Yes it returns to the window shown above If you answer No it asks you to remove the disk and then disconnects the session and returns to the logo window When a restore operation is complete the program ming PC disconnects the session and returns to the logo screen 15 28 GET DIAGNOSTICS This command button is the same as the diagnostics report command available from the System Administrator s mailbox feature code 520 It sends copies of diagnostics files Out put 001 Output 007 to the selected drive 15 29 OK When finished will all save and restore op erations select the OK command button to return to the window shown on the preceding page NOTE The applications will not be usable during a System Prompts save or restore and callers will receive reorder tones This is necessary to prevent user
276. the programmed parameters In the de fault state notification is disabled Notification Number If the message notification number is an outside telephone number it can have up to 16 digits It does not need to contain a Page 3 39 trunk access code it will use the outgoing access code programmed for the Remote Notification Tables window See page 3 50 Any valid inter com number can be used as the notification num ber Notification Start Stop Time Message notifica tion can be enabled for any time period up to 24 hours per day Default is 8 00am to 5 00pm If start and stop times are the same notification will be enabled 24 hours per day Notification Type The message notification number can be identified as a personal number a person will answer the call or a pager This de faults to personal number Notification Category Message notification can be set to place the notification call for each new message or only when priority messages are re ceived This defaults to each new message Remote Notification Tables The system can have up to 10 Remote Notification Tables see page 3 50 for programming information These tables determine what digits are sent when the system places a call to a pager Days Of Week Message notification can be set to place notification calls only on certain days This defaults to Monday through Friday Password A password of up to 12 dig
277. tination 4 6 call routing announcement 4 7 4 8 non subscriber voice mail 4 10 quick message retrieval 4 9 Dial 0 destination 3 63 3 64 Dialed pause duration timer 3 55 Digit translation 2 5 4 8 programming 3 18 3 21 3 22 Directory 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 20 3 47 automated attendant 2 3 extension IDs 3 27 entering usernames 3 39 3 41 mailbox recording 2 11 2 14 voice mail 2 14 3 39 3 44 3 57 Directory listing report 3 58 3 62 Disk storage space 1 3 Disk usage statistics 3 46 3 49 DOS 1 3 1 4 3 2 Drop down list box 3 4 DTMF delay timer 3 55 DTMF detection timer 3 55 DTMF feedback tones 4 4 DTR for hanging up modem 3 11 E Emergency assistance 5 9 Envelope settings for mailbox 2 14 3 39 3 44 Environmental requirements 1 5 zA i ESP system 4 17 call forwarding 4 20 camp on tones 4 19 hunt groups 4 17 message center 4 19 message waiting notification 4 19 outside calls 4 20 single line circuits 4 17 validated voice mailbox numbers 4 19 without voice computer hunt groups 4 18 ESPDX ESPMDX system See 256 832 Port systems Exit screen 3 15 Extended DTMF tones 4 4 Extension ID 2 3 2 4 2 8 capacities 1 2 programming 3 27 F FCC regulations viii Forwarding messages 2 12 G GLX Plus system 4 29 APM 4 29 call forwarding 4 29 camp on tones 4 29 hunt group 4 29 GMX 256 832 system See 256 832 Port systems GMX 152D system 4 25 call forwa
278. tion and press ENTER The monitor displays Write to CMOS and exit Y N N Enter y for yes and press ENTER The mon itor again displays the system memory check If the new hard disk drive already has some type of DOS installed the monitor eventually dis plays the C drive programming prompt C gt Format the hard disk drive and re install MS DOS as outlined in the following section If the new hard disk drive is blank the monitor eventually displays Insert BOOT diskette in A Press any key when ready Insert the MS DOS 6 2 Setup Disk into the floppy disk drive and fol low the instructions displayed on the monitor to set up and install MS DOS Then skip over the next section and proceed directly to Installing the Software NOTE When installing MS DOS 6 2 do not use the DoubleSpace or MemMaker utilities C FORMATTING THE HARD DISK DRIVE AND INSTALLING MS DOS 7 5 After setting up the PC motherboard format the disk and install MS DOS using the following procedure CAUTION Formatting the hard disk drive erases all information stored on the drive DO NOT format the hard disk drive unless instructed to do so by authorized personnel 1 2 3 4 5 Page 1 21 Insert the MS DOS 6 2 Setup Disk into the floppy disk drive At the C gt prompt enter a and press ENTER The monitor displays the A drive programming prompt A gt At the A gt prompt
279. tions at stations in the telephone system and to place outgo ing calls b Miscellaneous Information Telephone System Interface window System Type Se lect GMX 48 or IMX 2448 depending on your system type See page 3 53 in PRO GRAMMING C MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION 6 6 To ensure that station users receive the proper LED and LCD message waiting indications when they receive voice mail messages perform the following telephone system programming Station Data Specific Station Information DAA Assign each of the IVX500 port intercom numbers with a user name of V MAIL or some other similar identifying name eo Assign each IVX500 port as a voice mail sta tion 6 7 To ensure that the subscribers have easy access to their voice mail messages when responding to message waiting notifications program the following Station Data Specific Station Information DAA Assign the circuit connected to the Quick Message Retrieval application as the alternate message source for all of the IVX500 ports in the hunt group Applications Programming Port Programming Port Configuration window Enable Rem Ne Messaging Lamp Notification Enable any or of the IVX500 ports for Remote Messagin Lamp Notification This allows them to turn o the message waiting indications at stations in the telephone system and to place outgoing calls SY MESSAGE CENTER 6 9 The IVX500 Non Subscriber Voice mail applica tio
280. tistics You can check the following primary or alternate greeting If disabled the information beep will occur as soon as the primary or alter nate greeting ends In the default state this op Date and time of last log on tion is enabled Number of new and saved messages Envelope Settings The envelope announce ment that is played before each message can be Mailbox percent full programmed to announce date and time mes Number of times mailbox was 80 full or full Sage source and or message length The default envelope contains all information Number of messages sent and received Directory Information The mailbox can have an Total length of new and saved messages unlisted number not included in the mailbox di rectory but can be dialed if the caller knows the Number of times three bad passwords were en mailbox number and or it can be a private ex tered Page 3 40 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Bie ee LS yee AN A ee IIS a Message Notification Station IN _ Enable Remote Messaging 12 19 DESCRIPTION Enter a description of up to 20 characters in the Description text box This descrip tion is used in the mailbox directory and should be en tered in the form last name first name with a comma and space separating the names Do not use Control characters 12 20 MESSAGE NOTIFICATION STATION To select the station that will receiv
281. tive window To change windows scroll to the desired name Note that you cannot select a window that contains information that is affected by a window already in use you will receive an error message if you attempt to open two windows that af fect the same programming information Page 3 5 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE 5 USING THE HELP UTILITY 5 1 The system has an on line Help feature that pro vides general and context related information You can easily find information on features programming en tries and parameters And you can move among the topics to read information on related subjects 5 2 Help is available from any programming window To read the Help files use one of the following methods Select the Help drop down menu from a window header like the one shown above by pressing ALT H or selecting it with a mouse When the menu is displayed press O or use the mouse to select On Line Help to enter the Help utility or use the arrow keys if necessary to highlight it and press RETURN to select On Line Help To see an index of Help files press I or select Index o Press the F1 key on your keyboard This give you access to the Help file that is related to the active window in your programming session The pro gramming area where your cursor is located is the active window 5 3 The Help Utility is used as you would any Win dows applicatio
282. to abort The terminal displays the IVX500 applications directory prompt C avdap gt Remove Applications Software Disk 2 of 4 and insert Applications Software Disk 1 of 4 8 9 10 11 Page 1 18 At the C avdap gt prompt type cd util and press ENTER The terminal displays the utili ties directory prompt C util gt At the C util gt prompt type pmtinst and press ENTER The terminal displays the files being copied and the number of files copied Follow the installation instructions displayed on the terminal After the installation is complete remove the last software disk and disconnect the terminal The PC automatically reboots INTER TEL PRACTICES SPECIFICATIONS amp INSTALLATION IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 a O B CHECKING THE PC MOTHERBOARD SETUP 7 4 Check to see that the IVX500 PC motherboard is set up to work properly with the new hard disk drive as outlined in the following steps 7 IVX500 PC HARD DISK DRIVE REPLACEMENT 7 1 Ifnecessary the hard disk drive in the IVX500 PC can be replaced with a new drive as outlined below The instructions are divided into four sections Follow the steps outlined in each section NOTICE Depending on the specific BIOS used by the PC Motherboard the layout and editing functions of 7 2 Toreplace the hard disk drive the following items are needed the setup screen could vary so
283. to station extensions which do not have mailboxes and allows the station user to record a directory name and set up a password 4 8 Multiple mailboxes and extension IDs may be created However there can be only one System Admin istrator There can be up to 500 total mailboxes any type and or extension IDs in the voice mail system Ifa mailbox is created for an extension with an extension ID number the extension ID number is replaced with the mailbox B GROUP LISTS 4 9 Group lists are programmed in the database see page 3 31 They are lists of mailboxes that can be used by any Subscriber for sending messages to several mail boxes simultaneously The information that is pro grammed for group lists include the following e Group list description e Group list number e Mailboxes included in the list 4 10 Group Lists are not included in the Automated Attendant or Voice Mail of directories 4 11 The System Administrator can record the name for a group list 4 12 Instructions for using group lists are given on page 2 13 Page 2 8 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FEATURES Issue 1 August 1994 C INTERNAL MESSAGE NOTIFICATION Message Notification Station 4 13 Each mailbox has a programmed Message Noti fication Station This is usually the extension number that matches the mailbox number associated mailbox However a different number can be used for the mail box s message notific
284. to voice mail other than to the Quick Message Retrieval application placed by subscribers and non subscribers Callers will hear the main company greeting followed by a menu of available options In telephone systems with voice computer hunt groups internal callers will hear only the menu of options and not the com pany greeting Stations can forward or transfer calls directly to their mailbox using this application s ex tension number This application can also be the message center for the subscribers stations CALL TO NON SUBSCRIBER VOICE MAIL Voice Mail answers and plays a greeting followed by a menu of options Caller does not Call is sent to mailbox Or a sub scriber enter his own mailbox Call is sent to the Automated Atten dant s designated dial O operator Call is sent to selected mailbox e Quick Message Retrieval Only one Quick Mes sage Retrieval application may be created for the system It is usually programmed as the alternate message source for the Non Subscriber Voice Mail ports Ifso when station users to respond to message indications left by the voice mail ports they are prompted only for their password MESSAGE IS LEFT IN A MAILBOX IVX500 leaves a message waiting indication at the station designated as the message notification station for the mailbox Station user responds to message indica tion presses MSG key or enters feature code MESSAGE RETRIEVAL
285. traps DIP switches etc are installed in the ap propriate locations on the card c Referring to the manufacturer s user manual ensure that the two sections of the SPC are properly connected together d Insert the SPC in the appropriate slots and attach it to the chassis using the screws removed in step 6a Make sure the card is securely attached to the PC Motherboard and does not touch any adjacent cards Replace the cover on the PC and re install the SCrews To set up the audio interface between the tele phone system and the IVX500 PC see Figure 1 1 on the next page Page 1 7 a At the telephone system s MDF backboard ensure that a single line card with available circuits has been terminated on the left side of a station block Refer to the telephone sys tem s installation manual for details b For every Voice Processing Card in the TVX500 PC mount two four conductor mod ular jack assemblies c Referring to Figure 1 1 on the next page attach the modular jack assemblies to the right side of the station block d Plug one end of a two pair non reversing straight through mod to mod line cord into each modular jack assembly mounted in step 8b A non reversing line cord can be identified by examining the modular plug connectors side by side as shown below YELLOW a GREEN i RED BLACK A YELLOW o GREEN RED BLACK TWO PAIR NON REVERSING LINE CORD NOTE To use a standard two pair revers
286. tructions Envelope Settings Announce Date and Time 4 Announce Message Source 4 Announce Message Length Directory Information _ JUnlisted Number _ Private Extension and Mailbox Number ing will continue to play until the greeting selected here has been recorded 12 43 PLAY RECORDING INSTRUCTIONS To disable the instructions that play after the primary or al ternate greeting select the check box to remove the check mark To enable the option select the box again 12 44 ENVELOPE SETTINGS To determine which elements will be included in the envelope that is played before each message select the desired ele ments to place a check mark in their check boxes To dis able any element select the check box again to remove the check mark 12 45 DIRECTORY INFORMATION If the mail box will have an unlisted or private extension select the desired check box to place a check mark in it Or to dis able the option and remove the check mark select the box again 12 46 RECORDED NAME LENGTH PRIMARY GREETING LENGTH and ALTERNATE GREET ING LENGTH This section of the window displays the number of seconds used by the mailbox s directory name recording and the length of the primary and alter nate greetings The information is shown for reference only It is not programmable 12 47 OK CANCEL When mailbox information programming is complete select the OK command but ton Or to exit without saving any changes select th
287. ubscriber 3 Enter your mailbox number and password 4 When you hear the Main Menu list of options press a to select the Personal Options Menu You may then do any or all of the following steps Page 2 14 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE To change your personal greeting press 11 You have the following options a Press 1 to record and or enable your prima ry personal greeting or 2 to record and or enable your alternate greeting The system plays your current greeting To replay the greeting you can press 1 Press 3 to erase and re record your greeting as follows 1 Record your greeting after the tone then press 2 Press again to accept your greeting Or you can press to replay your ecting 2 to add to your greeting or fs to erase and re record your greet ing b Press 3 to enable the system default mail box greeting The system greeting is auto matically enabled c Press x to exit without changing your greet ing To change your recorded directory name press 2 a After the tone record your first and last name then press b Press again to accept your recorded name Or press G to replay your recorded name a to add to your name or press 3 to erase and re record your name To change your password press 3 a Choose and enter a new password using dig its 0 9 up to 12 digits If you do not want to use a pass
288. ubscriber voice mailbox owner has assigned a unique mailbox number and password At system default the passwords are the same as the mailbox numbers For example the default password for mailbox 101 is 101 4 7 There are three types of mailboxes on the voice mail system Standard Receive Only and System Ad ministrator There can also be Extension IDs which are stations that do not have mailboxes but that are in cluded in the recorded directory Standard mailbox features include listening to new messages recording sending messages deleting messages and saving messages and personal op tions Optionally if authorized through database programming a subscriber s options may include Remote Messaging e A Receive Only mailbox type is restricted from re cording and sending messages This type of mailbox has no access to Remote Messaging and may only listen to new messages save or delete them and ac cess Personal Options e The System Administrator has all of the options a Standard mailbox subscriber has However addi tional feature options include the ability to record and send broadcast messages to all subscribers of the voice mail system provide mailbox and group list maintenance and record and select Custom Record ings e Extension IDs are used in conjunction with transfer ring calls through the Automated Attendant or using the Extension Directory The extension ID allows callers to be transferred
289. uncement over flow station when a hunt group member becomes available For an alternate method of using digit Page 3 17 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE a Nanni NN NN NN translation in hunt groups refer to the manual for your telephone system 9 5 Port programing is also performed in this pro gramming area The parameters that can be established for each port include the following e Port Operation This determines how the port will be used Possible port operations include the follow o ing Application Used for telephone systems with out voice computer hunt groups The list in cludes all programmed applications description and extension number If a port is assigned to an application the type of application will deter mine the operation of the port Voice Computer Hunt Group For use with tele o phone systems with voice computer hunt groups only This port operation assignment indicates that the port is a member of a voice computer hunt group on the telephone system Its opera Page 3 18 tion is controlled by the commands sent from the telephone system Refer to the APPLICATION AND TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP section for detailed explanations of the dial rules needed to control these ports None This assignment is for unused ports Remote Message Lamp Notification If remote messaging lamp notification is enabled the system will be
290. units 9 5 An AXXESS System hunt group can be desig nated as a voice mail hunt group to enable it to contain the multiple ports of an analog voice mail unit like the IVX500 Each IVX500 port is programmed in the dis tribution list like a regular hunt group station With this feature incoming calls to the IVX500 can be sent to a single pilot number where they can be processed even if one port is busy or out of service Each hunt group should contain one type of application for example an Automated Attendant hunt group a Non Subscriber Voice Mail hunt group etc 9 6 The Quick Message Retrieval application should be assigned as the alternate message source for each of the IVX500 ports Then when a port leaves a message at a station and the station user responds to the message the Quick Message Retrieval application will be called instead of the individual port This arrangement allows easy subscriber access to the mailboxes 1 The following programming must be completed in the IVX500 database a Applications Programming window e Applications Programming Create the necessary IVX500 applications using the application setup instructions in this chapter e Port Programming Port Configura tion Select the appropriate Port Opera tion Automated Attendant Call Routing Announcement etc for each IVX500 port e Enable Remote Messaging Lamp Notifi cation Enable any or all of the IVX500 ports for Remote Me
291. up d Station Programming Individual Station Programming Miscellaneous Station Flags Programming window Y required en able DC ringing 3 Complete the following programming using a 4 Page 4 14 station instrument connected to the single line port that will be connected to the IVXS00 circuit a Temporarily connect a single line set to the station circuit assigned to the extension num ber of the last station in the hunt group 115 in the example NOTE If using a DC ringing single line set it will ring continuously whenever on hook This is normal and will not affect off hook programming proce dures b Lift the handset dial the forward no answer feature code default 356 and then dial the extension number of the first station in the hunt group 112 in the example c Remove the phone and reconnect the IVX500 port to the station circuit To use the hunt group arrangement the follow ing programming must be completed in the IVX500 database a Applications Programming window e Applications Programming Create the necessary IVX500 applications using the application setup instructions in this chapter e Port Programming Port Configura tion Select the appropriate application type Automated Attendant Call Routing Announcement etc for the Port Opera tion of each IVX500 port e Enable Remote Messaging Lamp Notifi cation Enable any or all of the IVX500 ports for turning on the message
292. uration of continuous dial tone that the system can recognize when placing or transfer ring a call and when disconnecting from a call The range for this timer is 1 5 seconds The default is 2 seconds Call Progress Dialtone Wait This is how long the system will wait for dial tone when placing a remote notification call or transferring a call through the au tomated attendant before disconnecting It must be set at least one second higher than the Call Progress Dialtone Duration Timer If you attempt to set it too low you will see a warning message and must enter a new value The minimum setting for this timer is the value of the Call Progress Dialtone Duration timer plus 1 the maximum setting is 10 seconds The de fault is 5 seconds Call In Progress Dialtone This is the minimum duration of continuous dial tone that the system can recognize during an active call for example when a caller hangs up while connected to the voice mail ap plication To disable dial tone detection on active calls set this timer to 0 The range for this timer is 0 5 seconds The default is 2 seconds Dialed Pause Duration This determines the length of pauses dialed by the system as part of feature codes telephone numbers and outgoing dialing strings The range for this timer is 1 500 hundredths of a second 1 100 to 5 seconds The default is 300 hundredths 3 seconds DTMF Delay This determines the minimum dura tion of DTMF tones that can be r
293. using the mouse mand listed below or enter any portion of the words in the window name For example to reach the Application Port Programming window you can enter APP PORT a p p app etc e Form Name Each of the programming windows can be selected directly by entering an abbreviated command in the Form Name text box To select a PROGRAMMING AREA ABBREVIATED CODES mon OOO OOOO Applications Port Programming APP or PORT Creates programs and deletes applications In cludes day night greetings and digit translation Programs ports to use applications or voice com puter hunt group dial rules and or place message notification calls Also sets number of rings before answer for port Extension ID Programming EXT or EXTID Creates programs and deletes extension IDs De termines number description and directory in formation GROUP or GRP or GL Group List Programming Creates programs and deletes group lists Deter mines number description and group list mem bers Creates programs changes and deletes mail boxes Also used for batch creation of mailboxes and clearing mailbox messages Determines all mailbox parameters including description mes sage notification station mailbox type remote messaging and password Mailbox Programming MAIL or MB Miscellaneous Information MISC Programs parameters for the following Automated Attenda
294. utlined in the APPLICATIONS amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP section Program a dial string to select a trunk for placing remote notification calls Make sure that the port has been programmed with outgoing access for the selected trunk group in the telephone system data base See PROGRAMMING page 3 51 Ensure that the feature codes shown in the tele phone system interface programming window match the feature codes that are programmed for the telephone system See PROGRAMMING page 3 53 The mailbox is not associated with the proper station The telephone system has not been programmed prop erly There is no outgoing access dial string programmed for placing an outgoing call The telephone system s mes sage waiting cancel feature codes do not match the IVX500 Remote message lamp noti fication is not enabled or programmed incorrectly Remote messaging lamp notification must be en abled and the desired port s must be selected to place outgoing calls See PROGRAMMING pages 3 18 3 26 and 3 42 Page 5 6 INTER TEL PRACTICES TROUBLESHOOTING IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE Issue 1 August 1994 a a PA AAA PP ES o PP FIGURE 5 1 TROUBLESHOOTING CHART CONT D SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION Audio volume levels from Programming error To adjust the volume level for all of the voice IVX500 applications such ports r
295. vailable disk space is frequently low a larger capacity disk drive should be installed in the PC 13 11 OK When finished select the OK command button to exit FEB 14 1995 FEB 14 1995 Page 3 49 PROGRAMMING Issue 1 August 1994 CRTR EA PRA Misce cellanecus F 02 Table 02 03 Table 03 04 Table 04 05 Table 05 06 Table 06 07 Table 07 08 Table 08 09 Table 09 10 Table 10 D REMOTE NOTIFICATION TABLES 13 12 This window appears when Remote Notifica tion Tables is highlighted and the Program command button is selected as shown on page 3 46 It allows you to set up pager dialing information and outgoing trunk access criteria in tables that are then assigned to the indi vidual mailboxes in the programming window shown on page 3 42 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE TRA Aes Yes RRRA AAA Ne St AR ato son PITA RARE RR temoto O Es R Y 2 aks SS RRA fean pA ATI rd 13 13 REMOTE NOTIFICATION TABLES PROGRAM To program a dial string table highlight it in the list box and select the Program command button A window appears as shown on the next page 13 14 OK CANCEL When you have finished pro gramming Remote Notification Tables select the OK command button to exit and save the changes To exit without saving changes select the Cancel command button Page 3 50 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE ea re eto IS AS OTIS a PSP
296. waiting indications at stations in the telephone system b Miscellaneous Information Telephone System Interface window System Type Select the appropriate system Note that there are two options for each of the 256 and 416 832 port systems depending on whether INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE APPLICATION amp TELEPHONE SYSTEM SETUP Issue 1 August 1994 eS standard or pure system tones Inter Tel tones are enabled on the telephone system See page 3 53 in PROGRAMMING C MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION 4 10 To ensure that keyset users receive the proper LED and LCD message waiting indications when they receive new voice mail messages perform the follow ing programming in the telephone system database Station Programming Individual Station In formation window Assign each of the IVX500 ports with a user name of V MAIL or some other similar identifying name 4 11 To ensure that the subscribers have easy access to their voice mail messages when responding to message waiting notifications program the following Station Programming Individual Station Infor mation Miscellaneous Information window Assign the extension or pilot number associated with the Quick Message Retrieval application as the alternate message source for all of the IVX500 ports in the hunt group 4 12 The following programming must be completed in the IVX500 database to allow the IVX500 to leave m
297. word skip this step b Press Your password is played back c Press to accept the password as entered Or press 3 if you wish to re enter your password To change your envelope contents press 4 A prompt plays to tell you the current status of your envelope contents a To enable or disable the time date option press 1 A prompt plays to tell you the cur rent status of the time date option b To enable or disable the message source op tion press 2 A prompt plays to tell you the current status of the message source option INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FEATURES Issue 1 August 1994 c To enable or disable the message length op 6 You have the following options tion press 3 A prompt plays to tell you the current status of the message length option d To enable all options press 4 A prompt tells you that all options are enabled e To disable all options press 5 A prompt tells you that all options are disabled f To return to the Personal Options menu press g Press to accept the personal options as en tered Setting Up Remote Messaging 4 39 Remote messaging is described in detail on page 2 10 To set up the remote messaging parameters fol low the procedure given below 4 40 TO SET UP REMOTE MESSAGING 1 Dial the Voice Mail application access number You hear the main menu 2 During or after the greeting press to
298. you and al low you to re record or save it If the IVX500 PC disk is full a prompt will notify you that it cannot accept your recording Hang up and try again later When you have completed your recording you have the following options If you are satisfied with your recording hang up OR press for more options If you wish to hear your recording press 1 If you wish to add to your recording press 2 and continue your recording as described in step 3 To erase and re record your recording press 3 INTER TEL PRACTICES IVX500 INSTALLATION amp MAINTENANCE FEATURES Issue 1 August 1994 4 58 TO ASSIGN CUSTOM RECORDINGS TO SPECIFIC APPLICATION EXTENSION NUMBERS 1 2 3 4 5 Dial the Voice Mail application access number You hear the main menu During or after the greeting press to identify yourself as a subscriber Enter the System Administrator mailbox number and password Press 9 to access the System Administrator s Menu When you hear the System Administrator Menu list of options press 4 to select the Select Cus tom Recordings option Y To go Bae MEET wish 6 7 8 9 Page 2 19 When prompted enter the extension number of the application to be programmed For example if users dial 299 to reach Voice Mail enter 299 to program the Voice Mail greeting Or press to exit to the System Administrator menu When prompt

Inter-Tel IVX 500

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents